1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
166 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
167 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
168 \author 274215730 "scott"
169 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
170 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
171 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
182 by the \SpecialChar LyX
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
189 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
190 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
191 Documentation mailing list:
193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
195 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
207 \begin_inset Newline newline
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
217 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
221 \begin_inset Note Note
224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
225 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
226 \begin_inset Newline newline
231 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
239 \begin_layout Standard
240 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
241 LatexCommand tableofcontents
248 \begin_layout Chapter
252 \begin_layout Section
253 What is \SpecialChar LyX
257 \begin_layout Standard
259 is a document preparation system.
260 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
263 business letters and proposals,
265 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
269 It is unlike most other
270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
277 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
278 That means that when you type a section header,
280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
309 takes care of the typesetting for you;
310 so you deal only with concepts,
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
320 If you haven't read it yet,
326 \begin_layout Standard
331 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
334 the format of all of the manuals.
335 If you don't read it,
336 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
337 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
340 \begin_layout Section
345 \begin_layout Standard
346 Like most applications,
348 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
349 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
350 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
353 \begin_layout Standard
354 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
355 This is not a bug or an oversight,
357 When you read a book,
358 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
359 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
360 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
365 The first case is large images.
366 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
367 left click on the image and use the option
378 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
380 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
383 \begin_layout Standard
384 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
385 menus and toolbar buttons,
386 have a look at Appendix
391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
393 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
401 \begin_layout Section
405 \begin_layout Standard
406 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
408 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
410 Just select the manual you want to read from the
417 \begin_layout Section
418 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
431 can be configured via the menu
433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
437 \begin_inset Index idx
442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
449 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
452 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
453 packages are available.
454 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
455 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
456 was installed on your system,
457 you might have some items that you installed locally,
459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
463 \begin_inset space \space{}
466 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
468 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
470 To force \SpecialChar LyX
471 to re-inspect your system use
473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
477 \begin_inset Index idx
482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
483 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
489 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
490 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
493 \begin_layout Section
496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
498 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
505 \begin_layout Standard
506 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
507 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
510 or print your documents
514 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
515 Some \SpecialChar LyX
516 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
525 which can produce PDFs and the like.
528 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
533 every \SpecialChar LyX
534 document can still be output as plain text
535 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
542 \begin_layout Standard
543 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
545 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
549 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
550 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
555 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
556 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
558 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
566 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
573 \begin_inset Index idx
578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
579 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
587 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
594 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 \begin_layout Chapter
599 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
603 \begin_layout Section
604 Basic File Operations
605 \begin_inset Index idx
610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
619 \begin_layout Standard
624 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
627 \begin_layout Itemize
650 \begin_layout Itemize
667 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
673 \begin_layout Itemize
696 \begin_layout Itemize
704 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
708 \begin_layout Itemize
710 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
722 \begin_layout Itemize
735 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
739 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
749 \begin_layout Itemize
772 \begin_layout Itemize
785 arg "buffer-write-as"
789 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
793 \begin_layout Itemize
795 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
807 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
811 \begin_layout Itemize
813 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
821 \begin_layout Itemize
835 \begin_layout Itemize
850 \begin_layout Standard
851 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
852 with a few minor differences.
855 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
866 command lists the available templates.
867 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
868 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
869 and possibly propose text fragments
873 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
876 you would otherwise need to
877 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
879 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
887 They can be of use for certain classes,
888 especially those for writing letters (see section
893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
895 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
902 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
903 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
906 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
914 \begin_layout Standard
915 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
948 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
949 to open a file or create a new one,
951 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
956 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
973 \begin_layout Standard
995 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
997 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1000 people work on the same document at the same time.
1004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1005 If you plan to do this,
1006 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1008 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1013 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1014 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1016 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1018 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1023 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1024 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1033 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1038 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1046 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1057 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1066 will reload the document from disk.
1067 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1068 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1075 \begin_inset space ~
1080 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1081 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1085 \begin_layout Section
1087 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1090 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1095 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1098 \begin_layout Standard
1100 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1102 lays much stress on safety.
1103 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1104 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1106 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1108 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1109 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1110 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1113 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1114 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1115 does not simply make a backup file,
1116 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1117 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1118 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1125 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1130 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1133 \begin_layout Standard
1135 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1137 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1140 \begin_layout Subsection
1142 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1146 \begin_layout Standard
1148 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1151 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1153 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1167 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1172 in preferences (see section
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1179 reference "sec:Paths"
1188 then all backups are stored there.
1189 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1190 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1191 but also the path in their name,
1193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1212 \begin_layout Standard
1214 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1215 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1216 and you need to enable
1217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1224 in order to see them.
1227 \begin_layout Standard
1229 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1230 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1231 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1233 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1236 \begin_layout Subsection
1238 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1242 \begin_layout Standard
1244 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1247 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1255 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1260 As opposed to the backup files,
1261 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1264 \begin_layout Standard
1266 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1267 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1286 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1292 with all changes saved.
1293 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1298 program crash or power outage),
1299 and this is when they might become useful.
1302 \begin_layout Subsection
1304 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1308 \begin_layout Standard
1310 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1312 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1313 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1314 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1315 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1318 \begin_layout Standard
1320 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1321 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1332 myfile.lyx.emergency
1335 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1337 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1340 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1341 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1344 \begin_layout Subsection
1346 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1347 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1351 \begin_layout Standard
1353 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1354 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1355 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1357 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1360 keeps a copy of the old version,
1363 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1366 where <n> is the old format (e.
1367 \begin_inset space ~
1373 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1376 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1377 that is alongside the original document or,
1379 in the backup directory.
1382 \begin_layout Standard
1384 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1385 As with backup files,
1386 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1390 \begin_layout Subsection
1392 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1393 When to Use Which File?
1396 \begin_layout Standard
1398 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1399 Now why all these files?
1400 Because they have different purposes.
1404 \begin_layout Standard
1406 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1408 terminates unexpectedly,
1411 \begin_layout Enumerate
1413 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1414 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1416 This file has the latest changes,
1417 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1420 \begin_layout Enumerate
1422 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1423 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1430 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1432 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1433 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1435 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1438 \begin_layout Enumerate
1440 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1441 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1442 use the backup file.
1443 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1444 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1445 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1448 \begin_layout Standard
1450 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1451 The fourth type of file,
1452 the backup file from old versions,
1453 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1456 \begin_layout Standard
1458 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1459 So much for the safety net.
1460 We hope you will not need it,
1462 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1463 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1468 \begin_layout Section
1469 Basic Editing Features
1470 \begin_inset Index idx
1475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1484 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1491 \begin_layout Standard
1492 Like most modern word processors,
1494 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1495 can move by character,
1498 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1499 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1500 editing features and how to access them.
1501 We will start with cut and paste.
1504 \begin_layout Standard
1505 As you might expect,
1510 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1511 along with various other editing features.
1512 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1516 \begin_layout Itemize
1522 \begin_inset Index idx
1527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1557 \begin_layout Itemize
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 \begin_inset Index idx
1609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1635 \begin_layout Itemize
1639 \begin_inset space ~
1645 \begin_layout Itemize
1649 \begin_inset space ~
1655 \begin_layout Itemize
1659 \begin_inset space ~
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1669 \begin_inset Index idx
1674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1683 \begin_inset Index idx
1688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1704 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1714 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1720 \begin_layout Standard
1721 The first three are self-explanatory.
1722 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1723 and other programs using
1745 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1750 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1751 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1752 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1753 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1757 \begin_inset space ~
1762 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1763 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1775 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1776 Possible formats include HTML,
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1797 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1803 \begin_inset space \space{}
1806 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1809 \begin_layout Standard
1813 \begin_inset space ~
1816 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1818 \begin_inset space ~
1822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1826 \begin_inset space ~
1835 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1836 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1837 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1847 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1848 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1853 \begin_inset space ~
1856 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1862 \begin_inset space ~
1870 \begin_inset space ~
1873 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1876 paste from the primary selection.
1877 This is normally the currently selected text.
1880 \begin_layout Standard
1883 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1885 \begin_inset space ~
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1907 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1909 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1913 Once you have found a word or expression,
1917 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1922 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1925 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1966 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1991 arg "word-find-backward"
1994 shortcut) to search backwards
1998 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1999 Even if you close the widget,
2009 arg "word-find-backward"
2012 will search further.
2017 \begin_layout Standard
2019 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2024 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2027 \begin_inset space ~
2032 field and searches the next match.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2045 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2047 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2055 the following options are available:
2058 \begin_layout Itemize
2061 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2073 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2076 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2077 If the toggle is set,
2079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2090 will not match the word
2091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2104 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2108 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2115 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2119 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2124 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2125 to only find complete words,
2127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2131 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2161 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2165 \begin_layout Itemize
2168 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2173 will limit search and replace,
2175 to the current cursor selection.
2178 \begin_layout Itemize
2181 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2186 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2187 without pressing the
2190 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_layout Itemize
2200 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2205 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2206 If this is not checked,
2207 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2208 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2209 so you need to put it back manually.
2212 \begin_layout Standard
2213 \paragraph_spacing single
2215 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2216 The widget also has a
2220 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2221 hiding replace and options.
2224 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2226 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2231 button brings you back to the full size.
2234 \begin_layout Standard
2235 \paragraph_spacing single
2238 also offers an advanced
2241 \begin_inset space ~
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2250 feature that is described in section
2251 \begin_inset space ~
2255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2257 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2265 \begin_layout Standard
2269 \begin_inset space \space{}
2273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2282 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2286 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2293 \begin_layout Standard
2297 arg "inset-select-all"
2300 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2301 When the cursor is inside an inset
2304 arg "inset-select-all"
2307 selects the content of the inset.
2311 arg "inset-select-all"
2314 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2318 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2321 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2324 \begin_layout Section
2326 \begin_inset Index idx
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2338 \begin_inset Index idx
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2352 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2359 \begin_layout Standard
2360 If you make a mistake,
2361 you can easily recover from it.
2363 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2366 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2369 or the toolbar button
2376 If you accidentally undo too much,
2379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2382 or the toolbar button
2389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2396 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2400 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2405 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2406 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2415 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2416 This is a consequence of the 100
2417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2420 step undo limit mentioned above.
2423 \begin_layout Standard
2432 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2434 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2435 but by blocks of text.
2438 \begin_layout Section
2440 \begin_inset Index idx
2445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2454 \begin_layout Standard
2455 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2458 \begin_layout Enumerate
2463 \begin_layout Itemize
2468 once anywhere in the edit window.
2469 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2473 \begin_layout Enumerate
2478 \begin_layout Itemize
2485 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2491 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2492 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2494 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2495 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2500 \begin_layout Itemize
2501 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2511 \begin_layout Enumerate
2519 \begin_layout Standard
2520 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2521 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2525 \begin_layout Section
2527 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2529 name "sec:Navigating"
2534 \begin_inset Index idx
2539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2548 \begin_layout Standard
2550 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2553 \begin_layout Itemize
2558 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2561 \begin_layout Itemize
2563 which is accessed either by the menu
2565 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2567 \begin_inset space ~
2572 or by the toolbar button
2575 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2581 \begin_layout Itemize
2582 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2584 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2587 and use the same menu to return to them.
2588 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2591 \begin_layout Standard
2595 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2600 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2601 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2603 \begin_inset space ~
2608 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2609 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2612 \begin_layout Standard
2617 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2621 \begin_layout Subsection
2623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2625 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2630 \begin_inset Index idx
2635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2652 \begin_inset Index idx
2657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2666 \begin_layout Standard
2667 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2669 labels and cross-references (see section
2670 \begin_inset space ~
2674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2676 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2683 or citations (see section
2684 \begin_inset space ~
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2690 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2696 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2699 \begin_layout Standard
2700 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2701 For example with citations,
2702 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2705 \begin_layout Standard
2710 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2712 if you are displaying the list of
2714 Labels and References
2716 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2717 you can enter the text
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2725 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2728 \begin_layout Standard
2729 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2734 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2735 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2740 option keeps it in the current view state.
2741 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2742 \begin_inset space ~
2745 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2750 the subsections of sections
2751 \begin_inset space ~
2754 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2759 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2760 \begin_inset space ~
2765 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2774 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2784 button refreshes the TOC (
2785 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2787 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2791 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2793 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2811 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2817 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2823 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2833 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2867 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2871 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2886 you can move section
2887 \begin_inset space ~
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2894 2.4 or after section
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2900 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2913 (or the corresponding key bindings
2921 ) you can change the level of sections.
2922 You can make section
2923 \begin_inset space ~
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2942 \begin_layout Subsection
2943 Horizontal Scrolling
2944 \begin_inset Index idx
2949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2951 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2978 \begin_layout Standard
2980 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2981 \begin_inset space ~
2984 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2985 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2989 \begin_layout Standard
2990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2994 \begin_layout Itemize
2996 is used on a small tablet computer
2999 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3012 \begin_inset space ~
3025 \begin_layout Itemize
3026 Math constructs with long command names
3029 \begin_layout Standard
3030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3032 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3033 window so that table
3034 \begin_inset space ~
3038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3046 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3050 \begin_layout Standard
3051 \begin_inset Float table
3058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3068 Horizontal scrolling test.
3076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3078 \begin_inset Tabular
3079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3125 \begin_layout Section
3126 Input/Word Completion
3127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3134 \begin_inset Index idx
3139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3146 \begin_inset Index idx
3151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3182 \begin_layout Standard
3184 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3204 \begin_inset space ~
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3217 \begin_inset space ~
3222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3226 \begin_inset space ~
3232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3233 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3236 \begin_layout Standard
3238 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3243 key to accept a proposed completion.
3244 If several completions are possible,
3245 a popup is opened showing them.
3246 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3247 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3258 \begin_layout Standard
3259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3261 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3264 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3266 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3269 he special math option
3273 enables characters to be composed.
3275 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3278 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3283 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3286 you want to insert the character
3287 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3292 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3295 input the characters
3296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3308 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3310 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3314 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3316 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3321 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3323 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3326 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3328 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3330 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3333 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3338 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3340 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3344 's installation folder.
3346 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3347 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3353 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3358 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3359 In the example above,
3365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3398 \begin_layout Section
3400 \begin_inset Index idx
3405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3412 \begin_inset Index idx
3417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3419 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3434 \begin_inset Index idx
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3441 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 \begin_layout Standard
3459 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3475 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3478 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3482 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3483 \begin_inset space ~
3487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3489 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3497 \begin_layout Standard
3502 \begin_inset space ~
3511 \begin_inset space ~
3536 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3540 \begin_layout Labeling
3541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3545 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3546 LatexCommand nomenclature
3548 description "Tabulator key"
3555 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3557 If you do not understand this,
3559 \begin_inset space ~
3563 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3565 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3573 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3580 \begin_inset space ~
3584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3586 reference "subsec:Lists"
3595 If you are still confused,
3601 \begin_inset Newline newline
3609 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3610 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3613 \begin_layout Labeling
3614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3618 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3619 LatexCommand nomenclature
3621 description "Escape key"
3629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3638 to cancel operations.
3639 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3642 \begin_layout Labeling
3643 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3648 These move the cursor,
3650 to the beginning and end of a line,
3651 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3654 \begin_layout Standard
3655 There are three modifier keys:
3658 \begin_layout Labeling
3659 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3677 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3678 LatexCommand nomenclature
3680 description "Control key"
3685 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3689 \begin_layout Itemize
3699 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3702 \begin_layout Itemize
3712 it moves by words instead of characters.
3715 \begin_layout Itemize
3725 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3730 \begin_layout Labeling
3731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3749 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3750 LatexCommand nomenclature
3752 description "Shift key"
3757 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3760 \begin_layout Labeling
3761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3779 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3780 LatexCommand nomenclature
3782 description "Alt or Meta key"
3787 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3788 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3789 If you have both keys,
3790 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3795 \begin_inset Newline newline
3798 This key does many different things,
3799 but it also activates the
3801 menu accelerator keys
3804 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3805 it selects that menu item.
3809 \begin_layout Standard
3812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3818 \begin_inset space ~
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3828 \begin_inset space ~
3836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3855 \begin_inset space ~
3861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3876 manual lists all other things bound to the
3884 \begin_layout Standard
3885 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3886 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3887 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3889 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3890 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3891 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3908 followed by a capital
3915 \begin_layout Chapter
3918 \begin_inset Index idx
3923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3943 \begin_layout Section
3945 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_layout Subsection
3973 \begin_layout Standard
3974 Before you do anything else,
3975 before you ever start writing a document,
3976 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3977 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3982 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3983 and format the title of your document differently.
3986 \begin_layout Standard
3991 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3992 By setting the document class,
3993 you automatically select these properties,
3994 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3995 If you don't choose a document class,
3997 picks one for you by default.
3998 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4001 \begin_layout Subsection
4003 \begin_inset Index idx
4008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4010 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4027 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4034 \begin_layout Standard
4035 You can select a class using the
4037 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4038 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 \begin_inset Index idx
4047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4049 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4064 Select the class you want to use,
4065 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4072 \begin_layout Standard
4073 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4078 \begin_layout Description
4079 Article for basic articles
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Report for basic reports
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Book for writing a book
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Letter for US-style letters
4094 \begin_layout Standard
4095 There are also some non-standard classes,
4096 which \SpecialChar LyX
4097 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4099 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4100 distributions will include many of these.
4101 Here are some of the classes.
4102 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4104 Special Document Classes
4113 \begin_layout Description
4114 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4127 There are three article layouts available.
4128 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4129 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4130 All result-type statements (propositions,
4132 and so on) are sequenced together,
4135 and the like have their own sequence.
4137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4140 sequential numbering
4141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4144 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4145 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4146 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4147 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4150 \begin_layout Description
4151 Beamer Layout for presentations
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4156 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4158 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4162 \begin_layout Description
4163 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4166 \begin_layout Description
4168 \begin_inset space ~
4171 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4174 \begin_layout Description
4175 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Foils Used to make transparencies
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4184 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4186 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4190 \begin_layout Description
4191 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4204 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4205 automatic print space calculation etc.
4206 (Is used by this document.)
4209 \begin_layout Description
4210 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4217 \begin_layout Description
4222 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4223 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4224 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4225 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4229 \begin_layout Description
4230 Slides Used to make transparencies
4233 \begin_layout Description
4235 \begin_inset space ~
4238 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4241 \begin_layout Description
4242 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4245 \begin_layout Standard
4246 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4247 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4249 Special Document Classes
4257 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4264 \begin_layout Standard
4265 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4267 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4268 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 \begin_inset Index idx
4277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4302 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4303 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4304 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4307 \begin_layout Standard
4310 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4317 are highly specialized.
4319 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4320 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4321 with a growing number.
4322 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4323 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4324 There are just too many of them.
4325 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4328 \begin_layout Standard
4329 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4338 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4339 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4341 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4344 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4351 manual for information on how to install them.
4352 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4358 \begin_layout Standard
4359 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4360 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4361 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4363 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4364 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4365 The \SpecialChar LyX
4366 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4369 users can write their own layout files,
4370 and many users have done so.
4373 Installing New Document Classes,
4381 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4388 name "subsec:Modules"
4393 \begin_inset Index idx
4398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4419 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4420 This is not available in any document class,
4421 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4438 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4453 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4456 \begin_layout Standard
4457 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4458 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4460 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4461 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4462 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4463 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4464 since \SpecialChar LyX
4465 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4466 file without the missing prerequisites.
4467 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4468 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4475 \begin_inset Index idx
4480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4481 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4488 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4496 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4505 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4507 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4518 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4531 Some modules require other modules,
4532 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4534 will advise you about these things.
4542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4546 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 \begin_layout Standard
4576 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4577 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4579 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4580 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4581 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4584 a particular document has very special needs,
4585 but you need a specific inset or
4586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4588 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4591 style only that one time.
4592 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4594 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4612 manual for information on how to use it.
4615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4619 \begin_layout Standard
4620 Each class has a default set of options.
4621 Here's a quick table describing them:
4624 \begin_layout Standard
4625 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4631 \begin_layout Standard
4633 \begin_inset Tabular
4634 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4635 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4636 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4637 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4638 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4639 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5094 \begin_layout Standard
5095 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5101 \begin_layout Standard
5102 You're probably also wondering what
5103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5107 \begin_inset space ~
5111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5115 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5116 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5122 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5127 Some document classes,
5128 such as the ones for letters,
5129 don't use any section headings.
5150 We will describe these headings fully in section
5151 \begin_inset space ~
5155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5157 reference "subsec:Headings"
5165 \begin_layout Subsection
5167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5169 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5174 \begin_inset Index idx
5179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5196 \begin_inset Index idx
5201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5203 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5220 \begin_layout Standard
5221 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5223 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5230 \begin_inset space ~
5238 \begin_inset space ~
5244 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5245 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5246 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5247 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5248 -class and its options,
5249 you have to read its manual.
5252 \begin_layout Standard
5254 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5258 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5262 \begin_inset space ~
5269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset space ~
5280 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5281 You can choose between the following five options:
5284 \begin_layout Labeling
5285 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5290 Use default page style of current class.
5293 \begin_layout Labeling
5294 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5299 No page numbers or headings.
5302 \begin_layout Labeling
5303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5311 \begin_layout Labeling
5312 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5317 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5318 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5319 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5322 \begin_layout Labeling
5323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5328 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5334 \begin_inset Index idx
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5357 How they are defined is explained in section
5358 \begin_inset space ~
5362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5364 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5372 \begin_layout Standard
5373 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5374 \begin_inset space ~
5378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5380 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5388 \begin_layout Subsection
5389 Paper Size and Orientation
5390 \begin_inset Index idx
5395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5397 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5412 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5414 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5421 \begin_layout Standard
5422 You can find the following options in the menu
5425 \begin_inset space ~
5432 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5436 \begin_inset Index idx
5441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5443 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5460 \begin_layout Labeling
5461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5465 \begin_inset space ~
5470 What size paper to print on.
5475 \begin_layout Itemize
5481 \begin_layout Itemize
5487 \begin_layout Itemize
5493 \begin_layout Itemize
5499 \begin_layout Itemize
5507 \begin_layout Itemize
5513 \begin_layout Itemize
5520 \begin_layout Labeling
5521 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5526 To choose whether to output as
5537 \begin_layout Labeling
5538 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5542 \begin_inset space ~
5547 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5548 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5551 \begin_layout Subsection
5553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5555 name "subsec:Margins"
5560 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5567 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5596 \begin_layout Standard
5597 Paper margins are set in the menu
5599 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5603 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5610 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5627 \begin_layout Standard
5628 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5629 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5632 \begin_layout Subsection
5636 \begin_layout Standard
5637 If you change a document class,
5639 has to convert everything into the new class.
5640 That includes the paragraph environments.
5641 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5642 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5643 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5644 If this is the case,
5645 and you change the document class,
5647 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5656 The name of the style is retained,
5657 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5658 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5659 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5662 \begin_layout Section
5663 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5664 \begin_inset Index idx
5669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5671 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5688 \begin_layout Subsection
5690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5692 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5699 \begin_layout Standard
5700 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5701 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5704 \begin_layout Standard
5705 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5706 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5707 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5708 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5712 paragraph of a section,
5723 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5724 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5726 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5729 \begin_layout Standard
5730 The space between paragraphs,
5731 like the line spacing,
5732 the space between headings and text —
5734 all the spacing for just about everything —
5735 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5738 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5742 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5745 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5746 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5753 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5754 goes to produce a printable file.
5760 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5762 gives you the ability globally to change
5766 these pre-coded spacings.
5767 We will explain more later.
5770 \begin_layout Subsection
5771 Paragraph Separation
5772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5774 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5779 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5803 \begin_layout Standard
5811 \begin_inset space ~
5819 \begin_inset space ~
5826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5830 \begin_inset Index idx
5835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5851 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5855 \begin_layout Subsection
5859 \begin_layout Standard
5860 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5865 \begin_inset space ~
5870 dialog and toggle the
5873 \begin_inset space ~
5878 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5881 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5885 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5886 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5889 \begin_layout Standard
5890 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5893 \begin_layout Subsection
5895 \begin_inset Index idx
5900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5919 \begin_layout Standard
5922 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5926 \begin_inset Index idx
5931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5947 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5950 \begin_inset space ~
5959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5960 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5966 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5988 installed to use this feature.
5993 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5997 \begin_inset space ~
6002 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6005 \begin_layout Section
6006 Paragraph Environments
6007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6009 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6014 \begin_inset Index idx
6019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6021 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6036 \begin_inset Index idx
6041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6042 Paragraph environments
6050 \begin_layout Subsection
6054 \begin_layout Standard
6055 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6067 } \SpecialChar ldots
6077 \begin_inset Newline newline
6080 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6082 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6084 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6085 we urge you to read the
6094 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6097 \begin_layout Standard
6098 A paragraph environment is simply a
6099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6106 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6107 This can include a particular style of font,
6114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6121 the different environments inside one another,
6122 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6123 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6124 on the fly margin adjustment,
6125 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6126 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6127 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6132 use the pull-down box
6133 \begin_inset Graphics
6134 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6140 at the left end of the toolbar.
6142 will change the environment of the
6146 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6147 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6150 \begin_layout Standard
6159 create a new paragraph using the
6163 paragraph environment.
6165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6172 because if you are in one of these environments:
6175 \begin_layout Itemize
6181 \begin_layout Itemize
6187 \begin_layout Itemize
6193 \begin_layout Itemize
6199 \begin_layout Itemize
6205 \begin_layout Itemize
6211 \begin_layout Itemize
6217 \begin_layout Standard
6219 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6224 rather than resetting it to
6229 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6230 \begin_inset space ~
6234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6236 reference "sec:Nesting"
6244 \begin_layout Subsection
6248 \begin_layout Standard
6249 The default paragraph environment is
6254 It creates a plain paragraph.
6256 resets the paragraph environment,
6257 this is the one it chooses.
6259 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6266 \begin_layout Standard
6267 You can nest a paragraph using the
6271 environment in just about anything else,
6272 but you can't really nest anything in a
6279 \begin_layout Subsection
6281 \begin_inset Index idx
6286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6288 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6305 \begin_layout Standard
6306 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6307 title page has three parts:
6309 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6317 for thanks or contact information.
6318 For certain types of documents,
6320 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6321 For other types of documents,
6323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6330 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6333 \begin_layout Standard
6335 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6350 Here's how you use them:
6353 \begin_layout Itemize
6354 Put the title of your document in the
6361 \begin_layout Itemize
6362 Put the author name in the
6369 \begin_layout Itemize
6370 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6371 want to use a fixed date,
6372 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6373 put that text in the
6378 Note that using this environment is optional.
6379 If you don't provide any,
6381 will automatically insert today's date.
6382 If you don't want a date,
6385 Suppress default date on front page
6389 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6390 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6392 \begin_inset space ~
6400 \begin_layout Standard
6401 You can use footnotes to insert
6402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6409 or contact information.
6412 \begin_layout Subsection
6414 \begin_inset Index idx
6419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6428 name "subsec:Headings"
6435 \begin_layout Standard
6436 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6438 takes care of the numbering for you.
6441 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6443 \begin_inset Index idx
6448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6450 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6467 \begin_layout Standard
6468 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6472 \begin_layout Enumerate
6478 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 \begin_layout Enumerate
6490 \begin_layout Enumerate
6496 \begin_layout Enumerate
6502 \begin_layout Enumerate
6508 \begin_layout Enumerate
6514 \begin_layout Standard
6516 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6517 separated by periods.
6518 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6519 Unlike the other headings,
6520 parts are numbered with
6521 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6523 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6525 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6532 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6534 suppose you're writing a book.
6535 You group the book into chapters.
6537 does a similar grouping:
6540 \begin_layout Itemize
6545 is divided into either
6556 \begin_layout Itemize
6568 \begin_layout Itemize
6580 \begin_layout Itemize
6592 \begin_layout Itemize
6604 \begin_layout Itemize
6616 \begin_layout Standard
6617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6626 Not all document types use the
6630 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6635 is the top-level heading.
6643 \begin_layout Standard
6649 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6651 labels it with its number,
6652 along with the number of the subsection,
6655 chapter that it's in.
6657 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6670 \begin_inset Index idx
6675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Standard
6695 The unnumbered section headings have a
6696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6703 at the end of their name.
6704 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6706 \begin_inset space ~
6710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6720 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6721 Changing the Numbering
6722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6724 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6731 \begin_layout Standard
6732 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6734 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6735 that's preset in the document class.
6736 Just as certain classes start with
6751 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6761 This is something you can change.
6764 \begin_layout Standard
6767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6771 \begin_inset Index idx
6776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6778 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6795 \begin_inset space ~
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6804 you will see two counters.
6809 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6810 numbers a section heading.
6811 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6815 Short Titles of Headings
6816 \begin_inset Index idx
6821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6850 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6857 \begin_layout Standard
6858 Some section or chapter titles,
6861 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6863 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6864 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6867 \begin_layout Standard
6869 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6870 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6871 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6872 To specify a short title,
6873 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6875 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6877 \begin_inset space ~
6883 This will insert a box labeled
6884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6888 \begin_inset space ~
6892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6895 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6896 This also works for captions inside floats.
6897 There can only be one short title per title.
6900 \begin_layout Standard
6901 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6904 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6908 \begin_layout Standard
6909 The following information applies to all section headings:
6912 \begin_layout Itemize
6913 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6928 \begin_layout Subsection
6932 \begin_layout Standard
6934 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6950 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6951 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6952 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6953 They also allow nesting,
6963 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6966 \begin_layout Standard
6967 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6976 when you start a new paragraph.
6978 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6982 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6985 once you are done typing in that poem,
6986 you have to change back to the
6990 environment yourself.
6993 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7002 \begin_inset Index idx
7007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7016 \begin_layout Standard
7017 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7018 it's time for the differences.
7027 are identical except for one difference:
7032 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7041 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7044 \begin_layout Standard
7045 Here's an example of the
7059 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7060 See – no indentation!
7064 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7066 there's no indentation,
7067 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7070 \begin_layout Standard
7071 Here's another example,
7079 \begin_layout Quotation
7086 you will see the indentation.
7087 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7092 is the environment for you!
7098 you were quoting other text.
7101 \begin_layout Quotation
7102 Here's a new paragraph.
7103 I could ramble on and on,
7104 like a politician at election time.
7110 \begin_layout Standard
7111 As the examples show,
7116 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7117 They should put quotes in the
7122 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7126 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7129 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7131 \begin_inset Index idx
7136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7138 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7153 \begin_inset Index idx
7158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7174 \begin_layout Standard
7179 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7188 \begin_inset Newline newline
7191 Which I did not rehearse!
7195 It could be much worse.
7196 This line could be long,
7199 so very long that it wraps around.
7200 It looks okay on screen,
7201 but in the printed version,
7202 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7204 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7210 \begin_inset Newline newline
7213 And make things look fine
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7220 arg "newline-insert newline"
7226 \begin_layout Standard
7232 does not indent both margins.
7233 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7234 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7238 arg "newline-insert newline"
7244 \begin_layout Subsection
7246 \begin_inset Index idx
7251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7267 \begin_layout Standard
7269 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7280 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7292 lets you provide your own label.
7293 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7300 \begin_layout Standard
7301 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7304 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7313 reset the environment to
7317 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7318 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7319 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7323 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7327 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7328 it returns you to the
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7339 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7340 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7341 we suggest you read all of section
7342 \begin_inset space ~
7346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7348 reference "sec:Nesting"
7356 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7358 \begin_inset Index idx
7363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7365 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7389 \begin_layout Standard
7390 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7394 paragraph environment.
7395 It has the following properties:
7398 \begin_layout Itemize
7399 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7403 \begin_layout Itemize
7405 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7408 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7413 \begin_layout Itemize
7414 The items can have any length.
7416 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7417 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7424 \begin_layout Itemize
7429 environment inside another
7434 the label changes to a new symbol.
7438 \begin_layout Itemize
7439 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7444 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7447 \begin_layout Itemize
7449 \begin_inset space ~
7453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7455 reference "sec:Nesting"
7460 for a full explanation of nesting.
7464 \begin_layout Standard
7466 that explanation was also an example of an
7475 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7478 \begin_layout Standard
7479 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7480 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7483 \begin_layout Itemize
7484 The label for the first level
7488 is a large black dot,
7493 \begin_layout Itemize
7494 The label for the second level is a dash.
7498 \begin_layout Itemize
7499 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7503 \begin_layout Itemize
7504 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7508 \begin_layout Itemize
7509 Back out to the third level.
7513 \begin_layout Itemize
7514 Back to the second level.
7518 \begin_layout Itemize
7519 Back to the outermost level.
7522 \begin_layout Standard
7523 These are the default labels for an
7528 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7533 dialog in the submenu
7538 \begin_inset Index idx
7543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7545 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7559 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7563 \begin_layout Standard
7564 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7565 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7566 \begin_inset space ~
7570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7572 reference "sec:Nesting"
7580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7582 \begin_inset Index idx
7587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7606 name "sec:Enumerate"
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7618 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7619 It has these properties:
7622 \begin_layout Enumerate
7623 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7627 \begin_layout Enumerate
7628 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7632 \begin_layout Enumerate
7634 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7637 \begin_layout Enumerate
7642 environment resets the counter to one.
7645 \begin_layout Enumerate
7659 \begin_layout Enumerate
7660 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7661 Items can have any length.
7664 \begin_layout Enumerate
7665 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7677 \begin_layout Standard
7687 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7689 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7690 labels the four different levels in an
7697 \begin_layout Enumerate
7698 The first level of an
7702 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7706 \begin_layout Enumerate
7707 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7711 \begin_layout Enumerate
7712 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7716 \begin_layout Enumerate
7717 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7722 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7726 \begin_layout Enumerate
7727 Back to the third level
7731 \begin_layout Enumerate
7732 Back to the second level.
7736 \begin_layout Enumerate
7737 Back to the outermost level.
7740 \begin_layout Standard
7741 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7747 \begin_inset space ~
7751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7753 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7759 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7760 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7764 \begin_layout Standard
7765 There is more to nesting
7769 environments than we've stated here.
7770 You should read section
7771 \begin_inset space ~
7775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7777 reference "sec:Nesting"
7782 to learn more about nesting.
7785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7787 \begin_inset Index idx
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_layout Standard
7812 Unlike the previous two environments,
7817 list has no fixed label.
7821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7828 of the first line as the label.
7832 \begin_layout Description
7834 This is an example of the
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7843 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7846 \begin_layout Standard
7848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7855 it is meant that the first usage of the
7859 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7860 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7861 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7865 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7874 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7882 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7884 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7888 \begin_inset space ~
7895 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7901 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7906 for more information.) Here is an example:
7909 \begin_layout Description
7911 \begin_inset space ~
7915 This one shows how to use a
7916 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7920 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7924 \begin_inset space ~
7936 \begin_layout Description
7942 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7943 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7944 It's not a good idea to use a
7948 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7949 You're better off using
7961 paragraphs into them.
7964 \begin_layout Description
7970 environments inside one another,
7971 nest them in other types of lists,
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7976 Notice that after the first line,
7978 indents subsequent lines,
7979 offsetting them from the first line.
7982 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7984 \begin_inset Index idx
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7991 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8008 \begin_layout Standard
8013 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8014 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8018 \begin_layout Standard
8027 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8028 Here are its properties:
8031 \begin_layout Labeling
8032 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8034 \begin_inset space ~
8037 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8046 of each line as the item label.
8051 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8052 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8054 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8056 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8059 space as described above.
8062 \begin_layout Labeling
8063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8064 margins As you can see,
8066 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8067 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8068 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8071 \begin_layout Labeling
8072 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8074 \begin_inset space ~
8077 width \SpecialChar LyX
8078 uses the width of the label,
8079 or the default width,
8081 If the label width is larger,
8083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8090 into the first line.
8092 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8095 \begin_layout Labeling
8096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8098 \begin_inset space ~
8101 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8105 environment has the same left margin.
8106 \begin_inset Newline newline
8109 To change the default width,
8110 select all items in the list.
8113 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8115 \begin_inset space ~
8120 dialog (toolbar button
8123 arg "layout-paragraph"
8130 \begin_inset space ~
8135 determines the default label width.
8136 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8137 but you can also use the letter
8138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8145 multiple times instead.
8146 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8156 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8159 \begin_inset space ~
8164 every time you alter a label in a
8169 \begin_inset Newline newline
8172 The predefined default width is the length of
8173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8192 list the same way as the
8197 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8202 environment gives you another way to do this,
8203 using a different overall layout.
8206 \begin_layout Standard
8211 lists inside one another,
8212 nest them in other types of lists,
8214 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8216 \begin_inset space ~
8220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8222 reference "sec:Nesting"
8227 to learn about nesting.
8230 \begin_layout Standard
8231 There is yet another feature of the
8236 As you can see in the examples,
8238 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8239 You can use additional
8242 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8247 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8248 justifies the item label.
8252 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8254 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8261 are documented in section
8262 \begin_inset space ~
8266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8268 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8274 Here are some examples:
8277 \begin_layout Labeling
8278 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8279 Left The default for
8286 \begin_layout Labeling
8287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8288 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8294 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8299 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8302 \begin_layout Labeling
8303 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8314 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8319 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8322 \begin_layout Subsection
8324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8326 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8331 \begin_inset Index idx
8336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8338 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8355 \begin_layout Standard
8356 The features described in this section require that the module
8358 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8360 is loaded in the document settings.
8361 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8367 \begin_inset Index idx
8372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8393 Custom Enumerate Lists
8394 \begin_inset Index idx
8399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8411 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8428 \begin_layout Standard
8430 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8432 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8435 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8436 There you add the command
8439 \begin_layout Standard
8447 \begin_layout Standard
8459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8460 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8469 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8483 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8490 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8491 For capital Roman numerals replace
8503 in the command above.
8504 For Arabic numerals use
8512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8519 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8535 \begin_layout Standard
8537 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8546 You can only number 26
8547 \begin_inset space ~
8550 items with Latin letters,
8551 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8559 \begin_layout Standard
8560 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8561 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8567 \begin_layout Standard
8568 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8571 \begin_layout Enumerate
8572 \begin_inset Argument 1
8575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8601 \begin_layout Enumerate
8602 \begin_inset Argument 1
8605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8628 \begin_layout Enumerate
8633 \begin_layout Enumerate
8634 \begin_inset Argument 1
8637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8661 \begin_layout Enumerate
8662 \begin_inset Argument 1
8665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8691 \begin_layout Standard
8692 For this list these commands were used:
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8706 \begin_inset Newline newline
8714 \begin_inset Newline newline
8722 \begin_inset Newline newline
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8739 makes the label emphasized and
8748 \begin_layout Standard
8749 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8758 When you change the label of a list level,
8759 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8769 \begin_inset Index idx
8774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8776 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 \begin_layout Standard
8804 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8807 \begin_layout Enumerate
8808 \begin_inset Argument 1
8811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8830 \begin_inset Note Note
8833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 goes back to default numbering
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8846 \begin_layout Standard
8850 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8854 \begin_layout Standard
8855 To resume an enumeration,
8862 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8863 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8864 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8871 \begin_layout Standard
8872 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8881 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8882 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8892 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8893 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8894 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8905 \begin_layout Standard
8910 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8914 \begin_layout Enumerate
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Standard
8923 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8926 \begin_layout Enumerate
8927 \begin_inset Argument 1
8930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8946 This enumeration starts at 4
8949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8951 \begin_inset Index idx
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8977 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8980 \begin_layout Itemize
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8985 with standard spacing
8988 \begin_layout Standard
8989 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8990 Add there the command
8994 to get no additional list space like in this example:
8997 \begin_layout Itemize
8998 \begin_inset Argument 1
9001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9020 \begin_layout Itemize
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Standard
9029 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9035 \begin_inset Index idx
9040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9043 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9058 For more information see its documentation,
9060 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9071 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9072 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9076 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9079 \begin_layout Enumerate
9080 \begin_inset Argument 1
9083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 \begin_layout Enumerate
9106 with negative indentation
9109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9110 Further Customization
9111 \begin_inset Index idx
9116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9118 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 \begin_layout Standard
9136 You can also change the style of description lists.
9140 \begin_layout Standard
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 changes the description label font,
9151 \begin_layout Standard
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 sets the list style.
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 An example where the command
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9174 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Description
9180 \begin_inset space ~
9185 \begin_inset Argument 1
9188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9209 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9210 therefore ionizing them.
9213 \begin_layout Description
9215 \begin_inset space ~
9219 In computer science,
9220 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9222 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9224 disk space or other resource.
9227 \begin_layout Standard
9228 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9234 \begin_inset Index idx
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9257 For more information see its documentation
9258 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9268 \begin_layout Subsection
9270 \begin_inset Index idx
9275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9286 \begin_inset space ~
9293 \begin_layout Standard
9294 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9295 has document classes for letters,
9296 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9303 \begin_inset space ~
9309 To use the letter class,
9310 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9311 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9312 gags on the document.
9321 \begin_inset space ~
9326 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9327 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9328 though you can't nest anything in them.
9331 \begin_layout Standard
9333 you're not limited to using
9340 \begin_inset space ~
9349 \begin_inset space ~
9356 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9363 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9370 \begin_layout Standard
9375 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9376 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9381 \begin_inset space ~
9386 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9387 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9388 Here's an example of each:
9391 \begin_layout Right Address
9393 \begin_inset Newline newline
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9408 \begin_layout Standard
9412 \begin_inset space ~
9418 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9419 which \SpecialChar LyX
9420 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9421 Here's an example of the
9428 \begin_layout Address
9430 \begin_inset Newline newline
9433 Where do I send this
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Your post office and country
9440 \begin_layout Standard
9449 \begin_inset space ~
9454 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9459 in either of these environments,
9461 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9476 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9485 arg "newline-insert newline"
9490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9493 \begin_inset space ~
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9502 ) to start a new line in an
9509 \begin_inset space ~
9517 \begin_layout Subsection
9521 \begin_layout Standard
9522 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9524 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9529 \begin_inset Index idx
9534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9543 \begin_layout Standard
9548 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9550 you could use this environment anywhere,
9551 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9554 don't bother trying to nest
9558 in anything else or vice versa.
9564 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9565 The book document classes ignores the
9570 and it's utterly silly to use
9574 in a letter document class.
9577 \begin_layout Standard
9582 environment does several things for you.
9584 it puts the centered label
9585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9593 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9595 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9596 just as you'd expect.
9598 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9600 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9602 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9605 \begin_layout Standard
9606 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9610 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9611 The new paragraph will still be in the
9617 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9620 \begin_layout Standard
9621 \begin_inset Float figure
9628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9630 \begin_inset Graphics
9631 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9639 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9644 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9665 \begin_layout Standard
9666 We would love to demonstrate the
9671 but since this document is in the
9672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9681 We inserted it therefore as figure
9682 \begin_inset space ~
9686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9688 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9694 If you have never heard of an
9695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9703 you can safely ignore this environment.
9706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9708 \begin_inset Index idx
9713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9722 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9734 environment is used to list references.
9736 you could use this environment anywhere,
9737 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9749 \begin_layout Standard
9750 When you first open a
9756 adds a large vertical space,
9757 followed by the heading
9758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9773 depending on the document class.
9774 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9775 Each paragraph of the
9779 environment is a bibliography entry.
9785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9786 Each new paragraph is still in the
9793 \begin_layout Standard
9795 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9797 For more information on that,
9798 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9799 's bibliography handling,
9800 have a look at section
9801 \begin_inset space ~
9805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9807 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9815 \begin_layout Subsection
9816 Special Environments
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9821 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9829 \begin_inset Index idx
9834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9844 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9851 \begin_layout Standard
9857 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9859 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9864 key as a fixed whitespace.
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9880 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9884 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9888 \begin_inset space ~
9892 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9894 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9899 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9918 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9920 If you need to insert blank lines,
9921 you will still need to use
9924 arg "newline-insert newline"
9943 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9945 when you finish using the
9951 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9958 environment inside of others.
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9965 \begin_layout Itemize
9969 arg "newline-insert newline"
9972 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9977 \begin_inset space \space{}
9987 arg "newline-insert newline"
9993 \begin_layout Itemize
9997 arg "newline-insert newline"
10007 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10013 \begin_layout Itemize
10014 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10015 You must put at least one
10019 in any line you want blank.
10025 \begin_layout Itemize
10026 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10030 since that will insert
10035 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10038 arg "self-insert \""
10044 \begin_layout Standard
10045 Here is an example:
10048 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10065 printf("Hello World!
10070 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout Standard
10079 This is just the standard
10080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10090 \begin_layout Standard
10098 such as program source,
10099 shell scripts and so on.
10100 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10101 \begin_inset Index idx
10106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10107 Paragraph environments
10112 For longer parts of programming code,
10113 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10115 Program Code Listings
10120 \begin_inset space ~
10128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10132 \begin_inset Index idx
10137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10146 \begin_layout Standard
10151 environment is similar to the
10156 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10161 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10175 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10176 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10178 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10181 space) and you can have empty lines.
10195 \begin_layout Itemize
10196 have a certain language and a text style
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 contain hyperlinks,
10202 foot- and margin notes,
10206 index- and nomenclature entries,
10211 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10215 \begin_layout Standard
10216 Because of these properties
10220 works like a typewriter.
10221 Here is an example:
10224 \begin_layout Verbatim
10228 \begin_layout Verbatim
10231 The following 2 lines are empty:
10234 \begin_layout Verbatim
10238 \begin_layout Verbatim
10242 \begin_layout Verbatim
10243 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10248 \begin_layout Standard
10253 environment is identical to
10257 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10258 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10265 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10269 \begin_layout Section
10270 Nesting Environments
10271 \begin_inset Index idx
10276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10302 \begin_layout Subsection
10306 \begin_layout Standard
10308 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10309 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10310 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10311 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10313 you have a list inside of another list,
10314 with the inner list
10315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10325 \begin_layout Enumerate
10329 \begin_layout Enumerate
10334 \begin_layout Enumerate
10338 \begin_layout Enumerate
10343 \begin_layout Enumerate
10347 \begin_layout Standard
10348 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10349 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10352 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10354 \begin_inset space ~
10358 \begin_inset space ~
10366 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_inset space ~
10375 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10376 Instead of the menu,
10377 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10380 arg "depth-increment"
10386 arg "depth-decrement"
10389 or the key bindings
10400 arg "depth-increment"
10406 arg "depth-decrement"
10410 The change will work on the current selection,
10411 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10412 or the current paragraph.
10415 \begin_layout Standard
10416 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10417 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10418 If it is invalid to do so,
10419 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10421 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10422 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10425 \begin_layout Standard
10426 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10427 In \SpecialChar LyX
10429 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10430 as you're about to find out.
10431 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10434 \begin_layout Subsection
10435 What You Can and Can't Nest
10438 \begin_layout Standard
10439 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10440 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10443 \begin_layout Standard
10444 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10445 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10448 \begin_layout Itemize
10449 Completely unnestable
10452 \begin_layout Itemize
10454 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10457 \begin_layout Itemize
10459 you can nest them into other environments,
10460 but you can't nest anything into them.
10463 \begin_layout Standard
10464 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10465 and which paragraph environments have them:
10468 \begin_layout Description
10469 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10470 Can't nest into them.
10474 \begin_layout Itemize
10480 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 \begin_layout Itemize
10492 \begin_layout Itemize
10498 \begin_layout Itemize
10505 \begin_layout Description
10507 \begin_inset space ~
10510 Nestable You can nest them.
10511 You can nest other things into them.
10515 \begin_layout Itemize
10521 \begin_layout Itemize
10527 \begin_layout Itemize
10533 \begin_layout Itemize
10539 \begin_layout Itemize
10545 \begin_layout Itemize
10551 \begin_layout Itemize
10557 \begin_layout Itemize
10564 \begin_layout Itemize
10570 \begin_layout Itemize
10577 \begin_layout Description
10578 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10579 You can't nest anything into them.
10583 \begin_layout Itemize
10589 \begin_layout Itemize
10595 \begin_layout Itemize
10601 \begin_layout Itemize
10607 \begin_layout Itemize
10613 \begin_layout Itemize
10619 \begin_layout Itemize
10625 \begin_layout Itemize
10631 \begin_layout Itemize
10637 \begin_layout Itemize
10643 \begin_layout Itemize
10649 \begin_layout Itemize
10655 \begin_layout Itemize
10661 \begin_layout Itemize
10665 \begin_inset space ~
10671 \begin_layout Itemize
10678 \begin_layout Standard
10679 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10688 Although it is possible,
10690 to nest numbered section headings like
10701 \begin_inset space ~
10705 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10713 \begin_layout Subsection
10714 Nesting Other Things:
10719 \begin_inset Index idx
10724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10726 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10743 \begin_layout Standard
10744 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10745 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10749 \begin_layout Itemize
10753 \begin_layout Itemize
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Standard
10763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10772 Figures and tables in
10776 are not affected by this.
10781 Have a look at section
10782 \begin_inset space ~
10786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10788 reference "sec:Floats"
10793 for more information about
10800 \begin_layout Standard
10802 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10805 or an equation is inline,
10806 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10809 \begin_layout Standard
10811 if you have an equation,
10812 figure or table in a
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10821 it behaves just like a
10822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10829 paragraph environment.
10830 You can nest it into any environment,
10831 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10834 \begin_layout Standard
10835 Here's an example with a table:
10838 \begin_layout Enumerate
10843 \begin_layout Enumerate
10844 This is (a) and it's nested.
10848 \begin_layout Standard
10849 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10857 \begin_inset Tabular
10858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10861 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10945 \begin_layout Standard
10946 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10953 \begin_layout Enumerate
10955 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10959 \begin_layout Enumerate
10963 \begin_layout Standard
10964 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10965 the list would look like this:
10968 \begin_layout Enumerate
10973 \begin_layout Enumerate
10974 This is (a) and it's nested.
10978 \begin_layout Standard
10979 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10985 \begin_layout Standard
10987 \begin_inset Tabular
10988 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10989 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10990 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10991 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11075 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11082 \begin_layout Enumerate
11090 it's not nested at all.
11093 \begin_layout Enumerate
11097 \begin_layout Standard
11098 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11099 but is also the first item of a new list!
11102 \begin_layout Standard
11103 There's another trap you can fall into:
11105 but not going deep enough.
11107 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11110 \begin_layout Enumerate
11115 \begin_layout Enumerate
11116 This is (a) and it's nested.
11119 \begin_layout Standard
11120 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11126 \begin_layout Standard
11128 \begin_inset Tabular
11129 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11130 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11131 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 \begin_layout Standard
11218 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11224 \begin_layout Enumerate
11226 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11234 \begin_layout Enumerate
11238 \begin_layout Standard
11240 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11246 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11248 if you nest tables,
11249 figures or equations,
11250 make sure you go to the right depth!
11253 \begin_layout Subsection
11254 Usage and General Features
11257 \begin_layout Standard
11258 Speaking of levels,
11260 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11270 is the innermost possible depth.
11271 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11274 \begin_layout Enumerate
11275 level #1 – outermost
11279 \begin_layout Enumerate
11284 \begin_layout Enumerate
11289 \begin_layout Enumerate
11294 \begin_layout Itemize
11299 \begin_layout Itemize
11308 \begin_layout Standard
11309 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11310 and you can see both of them in the example.
11311 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11312 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11322 if we tried to nest another
11327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11335 we would get errors.
11338 \begin_layout Subsection
11340 \begin_inset Index idx
11345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11364 \begin_layout Standard
11365 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11366 We have several examples of nested environments.
11368 we explain how we created the example,
11369 so that you can reproduce them.
11372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11374 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11377 \begin_layout Labeling
11378 \labelwidthstring MMM
11379 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11388 \begin_layout Labeling
11389 \labelwidthstring MMM
11390 #2-a This is level #2.
11391 We created it by using
11394 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11400 arg "depth-increment"
11407 \begin_layout Labeling
11408 \labelwidthstring MMM
11409 #3-a This is level #3.
11419 arg "depth-increment"
11423 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11427 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11433 arg "depth-increment"
11440 \begin_layout Standard
11447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11457 We did this by entering
11460 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11467 arg "depth-increment"
11471 then changing the paragraph environment to
11476 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11477 it also works for the
11494 \begin_layout Standard
11504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11510 \begin_layout Labeling
11511 \labelwidthstring MMM
11512 #4-a This is level #4.
11516 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11519 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11525 we can't nest anything inside a
11530 which is why we're still at level #4.
11536 keep nesting things inside
11537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11548 \begin_layout Labeling
11549 \labelwidthstring MMM
11550 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11555 \begin_layout Labeling
11556 \labelwidthstring MMM
11557 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11558 and this is level #6.
11560 you should know how we made these two.
11564 \begin_layout Labeling
11565 \labelwidthstring MMM
11566 #5-b Back to level #5.
11570 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11576 arg "depth-decrement"
11583 \begin_layout Labeling
11584 \labelwidthstring MMM
11588 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11594 arg "depth-decrement"
11598 we're back at level #4.
11602 \begin_layout Labeling
11603 \labelwidthstring MMM
11604 #3-b Back to level #3.
11605 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11609 \begin_layout Labeling
11610 \labelwidthstring MMM
11611 #2-b Back to level #2.
11615 \begin_layout Labeling
11616 \labelwidthstring MMM
11618 back to the outermost level,
11620 After this sentence,
11625 and change the paragraph environment back to
11632 \begin_layout Standard
11633 We could have also used the
11652 environment in place of the
11657 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11665 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11666 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11671 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11681 arg "depth-increment"
11686 \begin_inset Newline newline
11690 we will change to the
11698 \begin_layout Enumerate
11707 \begin_layout Enumerate
11708 Notice how the nested
11712 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11717 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11721 \begin_layout Standard
11722 We ended this example by entering
11728 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11732 and reset the nesting depth by using
11735 arg "depth-decrement"
11741 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11754 \begin_inset Argument 1
11757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11760 Levels and other list environments
11768 \begin_layout Enumerate
11774 paragraph environment.
11775 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11779 \begin_layout Enumerate
11784 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11790 arg "depth-increment"
11795 what happens if we nest an
11799 environment inside of this one?
11800 It will be at level #3,
11801 but what will its label be?
11806 \begin_layout Itemize
11818 even though it's at level #3.
11820 its label is a bullet.
11821 (We got here by using
11824 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11831 arg "depth-increment"
11835 then changing the environment to
11843 \begin_layout Itemize
11848 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11855 arg "depth-increment"
11859 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11864 \begin_layout Enumerate
11866 to get to level #5.
11869 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11874 Notice the type of numbering,
11880 because we are in the
11888 environment (that is,
11904 \begin_layout Enumerate
11909 change the paragraph environment,
11910 but decrease the nesting depth?
11911 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11915 \begin_layout Enumerate
11917 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11921 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11924 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11927 \begin_layout Enumerate
11931 arg "depth-decrement"
11934 to decrease the depth after the next
11937 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11944 \begin_layout Enumerate
11946 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11951 \begin_layout Enumerate
11953 Even though we've changed levels,
11955 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11958 \begin_layout Enumerate
11960 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11972 that \SpecialChar LyX
11977 reset the counter for the label.
11981 \begin_layout Enumerate
11985 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11991 arg "depth-decrement"
11995 and we're back to level #2.
11997 we not only changed the nesting depth,
11998 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12006 \begin_layout Enumerate
12007 The same thing happens if we do another
12010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12016 arg "depth-decrement"
12019 sequence and return to level #1,
12020 the outermost level.
12023 \begin_layout Standard
12025 we reset the environment to
12031 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12041 The number of other
12045 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12051 The same rule applies for the
12059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12064 \begin_layout Enumerate
12065 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12066 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12067 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12086 arg "depth-increment"
12095 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12097 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12098 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12099 Either before or after this,
12100 we will put in the level.
12104 \begin_layout Enumerate
12111 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12115 \begin_layout Verse
12116 Now we will add verse.
12117 \begin_inset Newline newline
12120 It will get much worse.
12121 \begin_inset Newline newline
12132 arg "depth-increment"
12144 \begin_layout Verse
12147 \begin_inset Newline newline
12150 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12151 \begin_inset Newline newline
12157 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12165 \begin_layout Verse
12166 Here comes a table:
12170 \begin_layout Standard
12171 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12177 \begin_layout Standard
12179 \begin_inset Tabular
12180 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12181 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12182 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12183 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12268 \begin_layout Verse
12272 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12284 arg "depth-increment"
12291 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12298 \begin_inset Newline newline
12306 arg "depth-decrement"
12313 \begin_layout Enumerate
12320 level #1) This is another item.
12321 Note that selecting a
12325 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12326 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12333 \begin_layout Quotation
12334 We're now ending the
12338 list and changing to
12343 We're still at level #1.
12344 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12345 The next set of paragraphs is a
12346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12353 We will nest both the
12360 \begin_inset space ~
12365 environments inside of this one,
12366 then use another nested
12370 for the letter body.
12374 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12377 to preserve the depth.
12378 Remember that you need to use
12381 arg "newline-insert newline"
12384 to create multiple lines inside the
12391 \begin_inset space ~
12401 \begin_layout Right Address
12403 \begin_inset Newline newline
12408 \begin_inset Newline newline
12414 \begin_layout Address
12416 \begin_inset space ~
12422 \begin_layout Quotation
12423 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12427 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12429 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12430 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12431 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12433 we thank you for your patience.
12436 \begin_layout Quotation
12439 now have a special on beef.
12440 If you are interested,
12441 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12442 along with payment.
12445 \begin_layout Quotation
12446 We thank you again for your patience.
12449 \begin_layout Address
12451 \begin_inset Newline newline
12458 \begin_layout Quotation
12459 That ends that example!
12462 \begin_layout Standard
12464 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12465 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12466 We could have easily nested an
12488 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12491 \begin_layout Subsection
12493 \begin_inset Index idx
12498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12500 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12517 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12524 \begin_layout Standard
12525 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12526 For example you need two different enumerations:
12529 \begin_layout Enumerate
12534 \begin_layout Enumerate
12539 \begin_layout Enumerate
12543 \begin_layout Standard
12544 \begin_inset Separator plain
12550 \begin_layout Itemize
12556 \begin_layout Standard
12557 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12563 \begin_layout Enumerate
12567 \begin_layout Enumerate
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 To split an existing list into two lists,
12577 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12580 Separated <Name> Above
12584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12585 Separated <Name> Below
12588 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12589 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12590 Inside nested environments,
12591 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12594 \begin_layout Standard
12595 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12596 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12601 you get an environment separator when you press
12604 arg "paragraph-break"
12611 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12614 \begin_layout Section
12616 Pagination and Line Breaks
12617 \begin_inset Index idx
12622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12633 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12635 offers you more spaces:
12636 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12637 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12640 \begin_layout Subsection
12642 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12644 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12650 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12655 \begin_inset Index idx
12660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12662 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12667 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12669 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12687 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12689 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12693 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12694 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12696 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12699 break the line at that point.
12700 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12704 \begin_layout Quote
12705 Further documentation is given in section
12706 \begin_inset Newline newline
12710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12712 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12720 \begin_layout Standard
12722 it would be a good thing to put a
12723 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12725 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12743 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12754 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12756 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12762 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12764 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12766 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12778 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12784 \begin_layout Subsection
12786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12788 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12793 \begin_inset Index idx
12798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12800 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12817 \begin_layout Standard
12818 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12821 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12825 The length units are listed in Appendix
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12832 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12840 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12842 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12844 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12848 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12852 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12857 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12861 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12868 \begin_inset Index idx
12873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12875 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12880 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12882 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12898 \begin_layout Standard
12899 With the introduction of typewriters,
12900 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12901 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12902 automatically takes care about this.
12904 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12906 \begin_inset space ~
12910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12912 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12918 To insert a normal space,
12921 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12922 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12924 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12926 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12930 \begin_inset space ~
12938 arg "space-insert normal"
12944 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12946 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12952 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12957 \begin_inset Index idx
12962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12964 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 \begin_layout Standard
12983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12987 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12994 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
12995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12999 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13001 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13009 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13011 inside abbreviations:
13014 \begin_layout Quote
13016 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13020 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13023 \begin_layout Standard
13024 or between values and units.
13025 Compare for example this:
13026 \begin_inset Newline newline
13030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13034 \begin_inset Newline newline
13037 10 kg (normal space
13038 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13044 \begin_layout Standard
13045 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13047 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13048 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13050 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13052 \begin_inset space ~
13058 \begin_inset space ~
13066 arg "space-insert thin"
13072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13076 \begin_layout Standard
13077 You can also insert the following space types:
13080 \begin_layout Description
13082 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13084 \begin_inset space ~
13090 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13094 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13098 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13102 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13104 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13107 space between the arrows.
13108 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13112 \begin_layout Description
13114 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13116 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13120 \begin_inset space ~
13123 space A line with a
13124 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13128 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13132 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13136 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13138 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13141 space between the arrows.
13144 \begin_layout Description
13146 \begin_inset space ~
13150 \begin_inset space ~
13153 space A line with a
13154 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13158 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13162 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13165 negative thin space between the arrows.
13168 \begin_layout Description
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13174 \begin_inset space ~
13177 space A line with a
13178 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13182 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13186 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13189 negative medium space between the arrows.
13192 \begin_layout Description
13194 \begin_inset space ~
13198 \begin_inset space ~
13201 space A line with a
13202 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13206 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13210 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13213 negative thick space between the arrows.
13216 \begin_layout Description
13218 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13220 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13228 \begin_inset space ~
13232 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13236 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13240 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13244 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13248 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13250 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13258 \begin_inset space ~
13262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13265 em) space between the arrows.
13268 \begin_layout Description
13270 \begin_inset space ~
13274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13278 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13282 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13286 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13290 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13292 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13296 \begin_inset space ~
13300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13303 em) space between the arrows.
13306 \begin_layout Description
13308 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13310 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13312 \begin_inset space ~
13318 \begin_inset space ~
13322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13326 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13330 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13334 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13338 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13340 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13342 \begin_inset space ~
13346 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13357 em) space between the arrows.
13360 \begin_layout Description
13362 \begin_inset space ~
13366 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13370 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13375 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13382 cm space between the arrows.
13385 \begin_layout Standard
13387 \begin_inset space ~
13391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13393 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13398 lists the different space sizes.
13401 \begin_layout Standard
13402 \begin_inset Float table
13409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13410 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13415 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13419 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13429 \begin_inset Tabular
13430 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13431 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13432 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13433 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13446 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13459 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13488 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13490 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13491 Non-breaking Normal
13498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13503 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13513 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13522 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13531 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13533 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13548 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13549 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13554 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13560 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13565 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13576 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13577 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13582 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13588 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13593 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13595 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13614 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13619 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13621 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13625 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13631 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13641 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13650 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13665 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13674 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13694 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13696 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13700 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13702 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13719 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13721 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13729 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13731 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13752 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13775 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13780 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13782 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13794 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13820 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13822 \begin_inset Index idx
13827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13829 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13847 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13848 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13850 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13853 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13854 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13855 If there is more than one H
13856 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13860 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13863 \begin_layout Standard
13864 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13867 \begin_layout Quote
13869 This is on the left side
13870 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13873 This is on the right
13876 \begin_layout Quote
13879 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13883 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13889 \begin_layout Quote
13892 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13896 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13906 \begin_layout Standard
13907 That was an example in the
13913 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13917 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13921 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13924 is one in a standard paragraph.
13925 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13930 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13933 \begin_layout Standard
13935 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13937 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13940 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13943 \begin_inset space ~
13948 s in the space dialog:
13949 The following patterns are available:
13952 \begin_layout Standard
13955 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13959 \begin_inset space ~
13965 \begin_layout Standard
13968 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13972 \begin_inset space ~
13978 \begin_layout Standard
13981 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13991 \begin_layout Standard
13994 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
13998 \begin_inset space ~
14004 \begin_layout Standard
14006 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14008 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14012 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14013 (= opened downwards)
14017 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14021 \begin_inset space ~
14027 \begin_layout Standard
14029 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14031 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14035 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14040 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14050 \begin_layout Standard
14051 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14061 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14063 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14066 is at the beginning of a line,
14071 in the first line in a paragraph,
14075 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14077 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14080 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14081 If you need space in this case anyway,
14083 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14087 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14092 option in the space dialog.
14100 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14104 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14109 \begin_inset Index idx
14114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14116 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14133 \begin_layout Standard
14134 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14136 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14139 \begin_layout Standard
14140 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14143 What is correct English?:
14144 \begin_inset Newline newline
14148 \begin_inset Newline newline
14152 \begin_inset space ~
14155 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14156 \begin_inset Newline newline
14160 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14171 \begin_inset Newline newline
14175 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14186 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14192 \begin_layout Standard
14194 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14199 \begin_inset space ~
14203 \begin_inset space ~
14207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14212 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14215 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14219 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14228 \begin_inset space ~
14232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14235 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14244 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14245 That is why it is named
14246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14254 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14255 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14258 \begin_layout Subsection
14260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14262 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14267 \begin_inset Index idx
14272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14274 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14291 \begin_layout Standard
14292 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14295 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14296 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14298 \begin_inset space ~
14304 There you find the following sizes:
14307 \begin_layout Standard
14311 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14320 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14328 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14333 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14334 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14338 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14343 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14345 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14346 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14348 \begin_inset space ~
14354 \begin_inset Index idx
14359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14361 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14375 for the paragraph separation.
14376 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14379 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14387 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14393 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14397 \begin_layout Standard
14399 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14408 equal to the height,
14409 or half the height,
14410 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14415 \begin_layout Standard
14419 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14425 \begin_inset Index idx
14430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14432 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14446 is a variable space,
14447 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14449 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14454 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14455 because the space between them is then maximal.
14459 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14467 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14473 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14481 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14486 s are described in section
14487 \begin_inset space ~
14491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14493 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14503 If there are several
14506 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14512 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14513 You can therefore use
14516 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14521 s to center text on a page,
14522 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14525 \begin_layout Standard
14530 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14531 \begin_inset space ~
14535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14537 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14545 \begin_layout Standard
14546 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14557 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14558 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14570 \begin_layout Subsection
14571 Paragraph Alignment
14572 \begin_inset Index idx
14577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14579 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14596 \begin_layout Standard
14597 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14599 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14602 dialog (toolbar button
14605 arg "layout-paragraph"
14609 There are five possibilities:
14612 \begin_layout Itemize
14620 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14626 \begin_layout Itemize
14634 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14640 \begin_layout Itemize
14648 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14654 \begin_layout Itemize
14662 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14668 \begin_layout Itemize
14676 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14682 \begin_layout Standard
14683 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14684 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14685 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14686 and look like this:
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14691 This paragraph is right aligned,
14694 \begin_layout Standard
14696 this one is centered,
14699 \begin_layout Standard
14701 this one is left aligned.
14704 \begin_layout Subsection
14706 \begin_inset Index idx
14711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14728 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14730 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14737 \begin_layout Standard
14738 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14739 does the page breaks in your document,
14740 you can force a page break where you want one.
14741 Normally this will not be necessary,
14742 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14743 is good at page breaking.
14744 Only if you use a lot of
14750 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14753 \begin_layout Standard
14754 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14758 have to change the page breaking.
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14762 There are two types of page breaks:
14763 One that ends the page without any special action.
14764 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14769 \begin_inset space ~
14776 that is inserted via the menu
14778 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14779 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14781 \begin_inset space ~
14787 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14788 so that it fills out the complete page.
14789 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14792 \begin_layout Standard
14793 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14796 the wrong way to do it.
14798 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14799 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14803 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14808 to learn more about
14815 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14819 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14824 \begin_inset Index idx
14829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14848 \begin_layout Standard
14849 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14850 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14851 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14852 including unprocessed floats,
14853 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14854 if necessary by adding pages.
14857 \begin_layout Standard
14858 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14861 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14863 \begin_inset space ~
14869 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14870 you can use the menu
14872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14873 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14875 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_inset space ~
14884 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14885 if necessary by adding a page.
14886 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14890 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14892 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14893 Suppressing Page Breaks
14896 \begin_inset Index idx
14901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14903 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14907 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14922 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14926 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14931 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14937 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14938 To discourage page break at
14939 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14941 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14942 certain point you can use
14946 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14948 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14951 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14953 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14960 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14961 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14966 \begin_layout Subsection
14968 \begin_inset Index idx
14973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14982 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
14989 \begin_layout Standard
14990 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
14991 one simply breaks the line.
14992 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
14994 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14995 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14997 \begin_inset space ~
15001 \begin_inset space ~
15009 arg "newline-insert newline"
15013 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15016 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15018 \begin_inset space ~
15022 \begin_inset space ~
15030 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15033 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15034 This is useful to avoid
15035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15042 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15045 \begin_layout Standard
15046 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15048 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15049 is very good at line breaking.
15052 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15054 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15055 \begin_inset space ~
15059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15061 reference "sec:Quote"
15068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15070 reference "sec:Verse"
15076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15078 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15086 \begin_layout Subsection
15088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15090 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15095 \begin_inset Index idx
15100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15109 \begin_layout Standard
15111 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15122 \begin_layout Standard
15126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15127 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15129 \begin_inset space ~
15134 you can insert horizontal lines.
15135 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15136 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15139 \begin_layout Standard
15141 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15152 \begin_layout Section
15153 Characters and Symbols
15156 \begin_layout Standard
15157 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15158 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15160 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15168 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15173 for information on how this is done.
15176 \begin_layout Standard
15177 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15182 dialog via the menu
15184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15185 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15191 \begin_layout Standard
15192 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15201 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15203 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15211 \begin_layout Section
15212 Fonts and Text Styles
15213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15215 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15222 \begin_layout Subsection
15224 \begin_inset Index idx
15229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15231 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15248 \begin_layout Standard
15249 There are two types of fonts:
15252 \begin_layout Description
15254 \begin_inset space ~
15258 \begin_inset Index idx
15263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15265 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15279 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15284 characters) in the font.
15285 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15286 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15287 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15288 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15289 \begin_inset Newline newline
15292 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15293 But to achieve a better quality,
15294 many fonts define several font sizes.
15295 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15296 \begin_inset Newline newline
15312 \begin_inset space ~
15320 \begin_layout Description
15322 \begin_inset space ~
15326 \begin_inset Index idx
15331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15333 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15348 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15349 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15351 they don't scale well,
15352 because in order to scale a glyph,
15353 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15354 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15355 In order to mitigate this effect,
15356 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15357 \begin_inset space ~
15360 pixels high up to 34
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15364 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15365 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15366 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15367 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15369 \begin_inset Newline newline
15372 Bitmap fonts are named
15375 \begin_inset space ~
15380 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15383 \begin_layout Standard
15384 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15385 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15386 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15387 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15390 \begin_layout Standard
15391 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15392 look at its document properties.
15395 \begin_layout Standard
15396 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15397 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15399 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15402 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15404 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15405 to emphasize text you use an
15406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15414 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15416 In \SpecialChar LyX
15418 you do things based on contexts,
15419 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15422 \begin_layout Subsection
15425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15427 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15434 \begin_layout Standard
15437 used its own fonts.
15439 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15440 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15442 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15443 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15444 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15445 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15446 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15447 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15448 files are very portable across different machines.
15450 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15451 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15452 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15454 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15455 \begin_inset space ~
15459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15461 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15467 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15468 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15471 \begin_layout Standard
15472 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15473 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15474 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15475 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15477 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15480 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15481 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15484 \begin_layout Standard
15485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15495 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15497 or other font deficiencies;
15498 so you might have to experiment.
15506 \begin_layout Subsection
15507 Document Font and Font size
15508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15510 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15515 \begin_inset Index idx
15520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15522 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15537 \begin_inset Index idx
15542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15544 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15561 \begin_layout Standard
15562 You can set the document fonts in the
15564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15568 \begin_inset Index idx
15573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15594 section of the dialog,
15595 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15600 \begin_inset space ~
15610 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15611 \begin_inset space ~
15614 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15617 \begin_layout Standard
15623 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15624 This requires that you use
15637 as the output format,
15639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15643 \begin_inset space \space{}
15646 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15647 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15648 installed (see section
15649 \begin_inset space ~
15653 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15655 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15661 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15663 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15664 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15666 \begin_inset space ~
15671 since \SpecialChar LyX
15672 cannot determine the family.
15673 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15674 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15677 cannot determine this in advance,
15678 so you might need to experiment.
15681 \begin_layout Standard
15682 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15683 fonts (which is the default),
15684 the possible options for the font include
15688 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15695 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15697 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15699 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15704 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15706 depending on the document language,
15710 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15711 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15719 \begin_inset space ~
15725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15735 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15736 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15744 \begin_inset space ~
15750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15758 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 European Computer Modern
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15792 some classes set different default fonts.
15795 \begin_layout Standard
15801 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15802 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15807 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15810 \begin_inset space ~
15815 version 6 or later,
15816 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15821 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15822 you have to use a vector font.
15823 Depending on how your document should look,
15827 \begin_layout Itemize
15831 \begin_inset space ~
15837 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15849 \begin_inset space ~
15854 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15855 community in order to replace
15859 as the default font.
15860 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15861 Except for some details,
15862 where the appearance was improved,
15866 \begin_inset space ~
15879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15880 One difference is improved kerning.
15888 \begin_layout Itemize
15889 If you do not like the look of
15898 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15904 \begin_inset space ~
15910 \begin_inset space ~
15920 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15921 \begin_inset space ~
15924 serif and typewriter fonts,
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15929 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15937 \begin_inset space ~
15946 for sans serif text),
15947 or different shapes of the same font,
15949 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15953 \begin_inset space \space{}
15961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15965 \begin_inset space \space{}
15971 \begin_inset space ~
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15989 but you can also select your own.
15990 \begin_inset Newline newline
15993 The differences between roman,
15997 \begin_inset space ~
16006 fonts are explained in section
16007 \begin_inset space ~
16011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16013 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16019 \begin_inset Newline newline
16025 \begin_inset space ~
16030 was originally designed for newspapers.
16031 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16035 \begin_inset space ~
16040 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16043 \begin_layout Standard
16044 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16060 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16065 depends on the class you are using.
16066 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16069 \begin_layout Standard
16070 Note that the font size is the
16075 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16076 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16078 and subscripts) by this value.
16079 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16082 \begin_inset space ~
16088 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16089 \begin_inset space ~
16093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16095 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16103 \begin_layout Standard
16107 \begin_inset space ~
16112 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16114 \begin_inset space ~
16117 serif or typewriter.
16122 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16123 the other selections override this.
16134 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16142 LaTeX font encoding
16144 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16150 \begin_inset Index idx
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16158 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16175 \begin_inset space ~
16179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16181 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16190 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16191 Unless you have specific reasons,
16193 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16197 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16205 \begin_layout Standard
16209 Use Old Style Figures
16213 Use True Small Caps
16216 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16219 Use Old Style Figures
16222 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16223 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16224 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16228 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16231 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16232 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16235 Use True Small Caps
16237 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16238 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16239 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16240 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16244 \begin_layout Standard
16246 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16249 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16254 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16260 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16266 \begin_layout Standard
16271 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16273 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16284 \begin_inset Index idx
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16306 So this has no effect for the document language
16322 \begin_layout Standard
16325 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16327 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16333 \begin_inset Index idx
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 \begin_layout Standard
16362 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16364 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16369 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16371 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16377 instead of ligatures (--,
16379 \begin_inset space ~
16383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16385 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16396 \begin_layout Standard
16397 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16401 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16410 When you choose a new font or font size,
16416 change the screen font!
16417 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16418 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16420 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16427 \begin_inset space ~
16431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16433 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16446 \begin_layout Subsection
16450 \begin_layout Standard
16451 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16452 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16453 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16454 fonts for your document,
16455 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16457 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16461 \begin_inset Index idx
16466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16468 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16483 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16484 automatically selects a math font.
16485 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16486 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16487 's default font family
16488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16505 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16508 \begin_layout Standard
16509 Note that the math font will not be used for
16513 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16519 or by the insertion of the command
16526 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16527 \begin_inset space ~
16531 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16536 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16547 \begin_inset space ~
16552 in the document font settings.
16555 \begin_layout Standard
16556 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16557 fonts for the document,
16558 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16559 font (in most cases
16560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16566 \begin_inset space ~
16572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16575 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16576 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16583 \begin_inset space ~
16589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16595 \begin_layout Subsection
16597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16603 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16607 name "subsec:charstyles"
16614 \begin_inset Index idx
16619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16626 \begin_inset Index idx
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16640 \begin_layout Standard
16641 As we've already seen,
16643 automatically changes the
16644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16647 style for certain paragraph environments.
16649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16651 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16652 This is where we meet the concept of
16658 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16664 \begin_layout Standard
16666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16688 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16699 available with all document classes.
16701 some document classes and modules provide
16705 for specific purposes.
16706 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16709 \begin_layout Standard
16711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16714 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16723 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16728 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16729 you selected it and chose e.
16730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16751 encourage the use of
16763 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16765 \begin_inset space ~
16769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16771 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16777 Rather than fiddling with
16782 they encourage the use of
16787 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16793 \begin_inset Quotes els
16797 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16802 \begin_inset Quotes els
16806 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16810 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16812 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16813 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16814 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16815 On a more practical level,
16816 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16817 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16822 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16829 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16830 With a semantic markup (such as
16836 you'd just need to change the definition of
16841 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16844 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16845 using different markup semantics.
16848 \begin_layout Standard
16850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16852 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16858 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16861 Builtin Text Styles
16862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16864 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16871 \begin_layout Standard
16873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16874 The two builtin text styles can be
16875 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16883 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16884 both of these styles
16887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16891 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16893 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16902 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16910 \begin_layout Standard
16916 do one of the following:
16919 \begin_layout Itemize
16920 click on the toolbar button
16929 \begin_layout Itemize
16930 use the key binding
16937 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16941 \begin_layout Itemize
16943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16947 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16949 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16959 arg "dialog-show character"
16963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16967 arg "dialog-show character"
16971 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16972 as described in section
16973 \begin_inset space ~
16977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16979 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16985 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
16995 \begin_layout Standard
16997 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
16999 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17003 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17007 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17009 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17013 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17022 style is already active,
17023 they deactivate it.
17026 \begin_layout Standard
17027 One typically uses the
17031 style for proper names.
17034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17041 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17047 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17051 \begin_layout Standard
17053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17059 is producing text in
17064 but the definition can be changed.
17069 \begin_layout Standard
17071 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17073 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17081 You can activate (or deactivate —
17082 it's also a toggle) the
17089 \begin_layout Itemize
17090 clicking on the toolbar button
17099 \begin_layout Itemize
17100 using the keybindings
17107 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17111 \begin_layout Itemize
17113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17117 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17119 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17121 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17129 arg "dialog-show character"
17133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17137 arg "dialog-show character"
17141 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17142 as described in section
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17149 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17155 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17165 \begin_layout Standard
17170 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17177 packages use a different font
17178 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17180 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17186 \begin_layout Standard
17187 We've been using the
17191 style all over the place in this document.
17192 Here's one more example:
17195 \begin_layout Quotation
17199 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17201 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17207 \begin_layout Standard
17208 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17209 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17210 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17211 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17212 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17214 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17219 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17225 \begin_layout Standard
17227 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17228 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17229 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17240 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17247 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17261 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17263 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17273 arg "dialog-show character"
17279 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17281 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17287 arg "dialog-show character"
17291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17295 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17299 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17301 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17308 \begin_layout Standard
17310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17311 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17312 a module (see section
17313 \begin_inset space ~
17317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17319 reference "subsec:Modules"
17328 or local layout settings (see section
17329 \begin_inset space ~
17333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17335 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17341 As the two builtin styles,
17346 markup for specific functions.
17353 module that provides,
17354 among other things,
17355 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17367 \begin_inset Quotes els
17371 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17377 \begin_layout Standard
17379 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17380 These styles can be found,
17384 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17386 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17394 \begin_layout Standard
17396 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17397 For the purpose of demonstration,
17398 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17402 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17403 By example of the emphasized style,
17404 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17409 appears as normal font change,
17410 the custom text style
17411 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17424 appears as an inset,
17425 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17426 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17428 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17430 \begin_inset Flex Code
17433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17445 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17450 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17460 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17465 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17474 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17479 \begin_layout Subsection
17481 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17483 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17487 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17493 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17501 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17503 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17509 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17514 \begin_inset Index idx
17519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17528 \begin_layout Standard
17529 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17530 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17534 so \SpecialChar LyX
17536 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17538 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17542 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17543 the properties of text passages
17544 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17549 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17551 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17552 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17556 \begin_layout Standard
17558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17559 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17561 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17562 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17567 comes in as a last resort.
17572 \begin_layout Standard
17573 Before we document how to
17574 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17575 use custom character style
17576 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17577 tweak the text properties
17580 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17589 \begin_inset Newline newline
17592 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17595 \begin_layout Standard
17597 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17598 use custom character styles
17599 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17600 tweak text properties
17604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17612 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17620 arg "dialog-show character"
17623 dialog or press the toolbar button
17626 arg "dialog-show character"
17631 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17634 boxes in this dialog,
17635 each corresponding to a different
17636 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17641 property that you can choose.
17642 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17646 \begin_inset space ~
17652 which keeps the current state of that property.
17654 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17658 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17660 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17665 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17666 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17669 \begin_layout Standard
17671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17673 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17677 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17679 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17683 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17685 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17691 and their options (in addition to
17694 \begin_inset space ~
17700 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17704 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17712 \begin_layout Labeling
17713 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17727 The possible options are:
17731 \begin_layout Labeling
17732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17737 This is the Roman font family.
17738 Normally a serif font.
17739 It's also the default family.
17749 \begin_layout Labeling
17750 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17754 \begin_inset space ~
17761 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17773 \begin_layout Labeling
17774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17781 This is the Typewriter font family.
17787 arg "font-typewriter"
17793 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17797 \begin_layout Standard
17799 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17800 The general differences of these families are:
17803 \begin_layout Itemize
17805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17810 fonts use characters with serifs.
17811 These are the small
17812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17819 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17820 The following example shows the difference:
17821 \begin_inset Newline newline
17825 \begin_inset Newline newline
17830 text without serifs
17833 \begin_inset Newline newline
17836 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17837 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17844 \begin_layout Itemize
17846 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17851 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17852 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17853 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17856 \begin_layout Itemize
17858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17872 which means every character has the same width;
17874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17891 \begin_inset Newline newline
17895 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17900 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17913 \begin_inset Note Note
17916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17919 For more on phantoms see section
17920 \begin_inset space ~
17924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17926 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17937 \begin_inset Newline newline
17946 \begin_layout Labeling
17947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17952 This corresponds to the print weight.
17957 \begin_layout Labeling
17958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17963 This is the Medium font series.
17964 It's also the default series.
17967 \begin_layout Labeling
17968 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17975 This is the Bold font series.
17988 \begin_layout Labeling
17989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17994 As the name implies.
17999 \begin_layout Labeling
18000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18005 This is the Upright font shape.
18006 It's also the default shape.
18009 \begin_layout Labeling
18010 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18020 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18030 s the Italic font shape
18036 \begin_layout Labeling
18037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18044 This is the Slanted font shape
18046 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18048 this is different from italic).
18051 \begin_layout Labeling
18052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18056 \begin_inset space ~
18063 This is the Small caps font shape
18070 \begin_layout Labeling
18071 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18073 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18078 Alters the text color.
18079 Note that not all DVI
18080 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18082 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18083 viewers are able to display colors.
18087 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18089 \begin_inset space ~
18093 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18097 which means that the document default color set in
18099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18100 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18106 \begin_inset space ~
18113 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18115 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18117 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18119 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18214 \begin_inset Index idx
18219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18221 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18242 \begin_layout Labeling
18243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18245 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18250 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18251 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18252 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18253 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18254 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18256 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18258 \begin_inset Newline newline
18261 If you have for example,
18262 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18264 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18265 When using the spell checking (see section
18266 \begin_inset space ~
18270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18272 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18277 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18278 \begin_inset Newline newline
18281 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18284 Exclude from Spellchecking
18287 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18292 \begin_layout Labeling
18293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18298 Alters the size of the font.
18300 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18309 numerical values here;
18310 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18312 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18314 but a general description of what you want to do.
18319 \begin_layout Labeling
18320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18341 arg "font-size tiny"
18347 \begin_layout Labeling
18348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18369 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18375 \begin_layout Labeling
18376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18397 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18403 \begin_layout Labeling
18404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18425 arg "font-size small"
18431 \begin_layout Labeling
18432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18446 It's also the default size.
18450 arg "font-size normal"
18456 \begin_layout Labeling
18457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18478 arg "font-size large"
18484 \begin_layout Labeling
18485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18506 arg "font-size larger"
18512 \begin_layout Labeling
18513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18534 arg "font-size largest"
18540 \begin_layout Labeling
18541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18562 arg "font-size huge"
18568 \begin_layout Labeling
18569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18590 arg "font-size giant"
18596 \begin_layout Labeling
18597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18602 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18623 arg "font-size increase"
18629 \begin_layout Labeling
18630 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18635 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18656 arg "font-size decrease"
18662 \begin_layout Standard
18668 don't go crazy with this feature.
18669 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18671 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18673 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18674 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18679 \begin_layout Standard
18681 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18682 Another combo box allows to tweak
18689 \begin_layout Labeling
18690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18692 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18697 Alters the text color.
18698 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18704 which means that the document default color set in
18706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18707 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18713 \begin_inset space ~
18813 \begin_inset Index idx
18818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18820 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18847 \begin_layout Labeling
18848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18850 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18860 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18861 change a few other things at the character level
18862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18863 have text passages being underlined
18867 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18868 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18869 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18870 when you could not change fonts.
18871 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18872 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18873 because some people
18877 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18884 \begin_layout Labeling
18885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18894 This is text with emphasize on
18897 This might seem like the same as
18902 but it is actually a bit different.
18908 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18909 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18914 \begin_layout Labeling
18915 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18917 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18922 Don't use underlining.
18927 \begin_layout Labeling
18928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18930 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18934 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18944 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18953 arg "font-underline"
18959 \begin_inset Newline newline
18963 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18966 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18967 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18968 when you could not change fonts.
18969 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18970 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18971 because some people
18975 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18980 \begin_layout Labeling
18981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18987 \begin_inset space ~
18996 This is text with Double under
18997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
18999 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19008 arg "font-underunderline"
19012 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19014 \begin_inset Newline newline
19017 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19018 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19023 \begin_layout Labeling
19024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19028 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19030 \begin_inset space ~
19039 This is text with Wavy under
19040 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19042 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19051 arg "font-underwave"
19055 \begin_inset Newline newline
19058 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19059 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19065 \begin_layout Labeling
19066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19068 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19073 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19079 \begin_layout Labeling
19080 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19082 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19087 Don't use strikethrough.
19090 \begin_layout Labeling
19091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19095 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19097 \begin_inset space ~
19101 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19111 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19112 Single strikethrough
19120 arg "font-strikeout"
19124 \begin_inset Newline newline
19127 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19130 \begin_layout Labeling
19131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19133 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19143 \begin_inset space ~
19147 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19157 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19163 \begin_inset Newline newline
19166 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19170 \begin_layout Standard
19172 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19173 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19176 \begin_layout Labeling
19177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19179 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19184 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19185 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19186 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19187 \begin_inset Newline newline
19190 If you have for example,
19191 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19193 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19194 When using the spell checking (see section
19195 \begin_inset space ~
19199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19201 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19206 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19207 \begin_inset Newline newline
19210 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19213 Exclude from Spellchecking
19216 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19219 \begin_layout Standard
19221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19222 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19223 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19224 \begin_inset space ~
19228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19230 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19236 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19246 \begin_layout Itemize
19248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19256 This is text with emphasize on
19261 \begin_layout Itemize
19265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19273 This is text with Noun on.
19275 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19283 this is a logical attribute.
19284 Normally it's equivalent to
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19297 \begin_layout Standard
19298 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19299 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19301 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19306 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19307 chosen a new character style
19308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19309 applied a text property
19312 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19315 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19320 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19328 arg "dialog-show character"
19334 arg "dialog-show character"
19339 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19343 You can activate the
19344 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19347 last applied properties
19349 by using the toolbar button
19352 arg "textstyle-apply"
19356 The button lets you apply
19357 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19358 your custom character style
19359 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19362 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19364 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19365 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19366 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19367 20) most recently applied settings,
19368 from which you can select one.
19373 \begin_layout Standard
19374 To completely reset the
19375 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19377 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19378 text properties of a selection
19382 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19384 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19394 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19399 from the menu of the toolbar button
19402 arg "textstyle-apply"
19409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19410 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19430 \begin_inset space ~
19444 \begin_layout Standard
19446 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19447 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19455 \begin_inset space ~
19468 \begin_layout Itemize
19470 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19484 which means every character has the same width;
19486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19503 \begin_inset Newline newline
19507 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 \begin_inset Note Note
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19525 For more on phantoms see section
19526 \begin_inset space ~
19530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19532 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19543 \begin_inset Newline newline
19549 \begin_layout Itemize
19551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19556 fonts use characters with serifs.
19557 These are the small
19558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19565 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19566 The following example shows the difference:
19567 \begin_inset Newline newline
19571 \begin_inset Newline newline
19576 text without serifs
19579 \begin_inset Newline newline
19582 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19583 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19590 \begin_layout Itemize
19592 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19597 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19598 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19599 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19604 \begin_layout Standard
19606 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19614 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19615 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19618 \begin_inset space ~
19624 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19627 apply a style with properties A,
19628 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19631 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19632 the text ends up with properties A,
19636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19651 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19652 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19661 toggling behavior is up to you.
19665 \begin_inset space ~
19671 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19705 \begin_inset space ~
19711 then apply the style to bold face text,
19712 the text will revert to the default series (
19713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19721 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19726 \begin_layout Standard
19728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19731 with the same warning once again:
19732 Do not overuse the fonts!
19734 more often than not,
19735 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19738 \begin_layout Section
19739 Printing and Previewing
19742 \begin_layout Subsection
19746 \begin_layout Standard
19747 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19749 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19750 Before we tell you that,
19751 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19752 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19754 Additional Features
19759 \begin_layout Standard
19761 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19764 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19765 typesetting system,
19766 but to prevent confusion,
19767 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19770 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19773 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19774 to turn your writing into printable output.
19775 This happens in two stages:
19778 \begin_layout Enumerate
19781 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19783 generating a file with the extension,
19785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19799 \begin_layout Enumerate
19802 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19803 to use the commands in the
19807 file to produce printable output.
19810 \begin_layout Subsection
19811 Output file formats
19812 \begin_inset Index idx
19817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19826 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19833 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19835 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19837 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19841 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19845 \begin_inset Index idx
19850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19859 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19875 \begin_layout Standard
19876 This file type has the extension
19877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19889 It contains your document as plain text
19890 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19892 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19893 following the rules of the
19894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19897 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19906 \begin_layout Standard
19907 You can export your document to
19908 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19910 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19915 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19916 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19918 \begin_inset space ~
19925 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19926 bibliography (section
19927 \begin_inset space ~
19931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19933 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19939 If your document includes such material,
19942 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19943 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19945 \begin_inset space ~
19949 \begin_inset space ~
19953 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset space ~
19965 \begin_inset space ~
19971 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19972 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19974 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19983 \begin_inset Index idx
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20008 \begin_layout Standard
20009 This file type has the extension
20010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20021 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20022 program to process your document.
20023 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20025 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20026 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20027 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20028 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20029 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20032 \begin_layout Standard
20033 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 -file using the menu
20036 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20037 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20041 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20042 export variants are explained in section
20043 \begin_inset space ~
20047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20049 reference "subsec:Export"
20057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20059 \begin_inset Index idx
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 \begin_layout Standard
20084 This file type has the extension
20085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20106 because it is completely portable;
20107 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20108 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20112 \begin_layout Standard
20113 DVI files do not contain images,
20114 they only link to them.
20115 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20116 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20117 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20118 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20121 \begin_layout Standard
20122 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20124 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20125 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20130 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20131 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20133 \begin_inset space ~
20139 The latter option uses the program
20141 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20147 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20150 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20151 \begin_inset space ~
20155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20157 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20163 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20164 is still a work in progress,
20165 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20171 \begin_inset Index idx
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 \begin_layout Standard
20196 This file type has the extension
20197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20209 PostScript was developed by the company
20213 as a printer language.
20214 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20215 PostScript can be seen as a
20216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20219 programming language
20220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20224 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20229 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20230 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20236 \begin_inset Index idx
20241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20244 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20263 As a result of this,
20264 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20267 \begin_layout Standard
20268 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20272 Encapsulated PostScript
20273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20290 As \SpecialChar LyX
20291 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20292 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20296 \begin_inset space ~
20299 images in your document,
20302 \begin_inset space ~
20305 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20306 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20308 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20309 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20312 \begin_layout Standard
20313 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20315 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20316 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20324 \begin_inset Index idx
20329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20331 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 \begin_inset Index idx
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20360 \begin_layout Standard
20361 This file type has the extension
20362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20378 Portable Document Format
20379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20386 was derived from PostScript.
20387 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20397 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20400 \begin_layout Standard
20401 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20405 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20438 Portable Network Graphics
20439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20456 You can also use any other image format,
20457 because \SpecialChar LyX
20458 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20459 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20460 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20461 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20464 \begin_layout Standard
20465 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20467 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20473 \begin_layout Description
20475 \begin_inset space ~
20478 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20482 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20485 \begin_layout Description
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20494 ) This uses the program
20496 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20499 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20502 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20511 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20512 \begin_inset space ~
20516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20518 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20525 is still a work in progress,
20526 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20530 \begin_layout Description
20532 \begin_inset space ~
20539 ) This uses the program
20544 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20550 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20551 \begin_inset space ~
20555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20557 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20563 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20565 vertically written Japanese.
20568 \begin_layout Description
20570 \begin_inset space ~
20573 (cropped) This is the same as
20576 \begin_inset space ~
20581 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20582 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20583 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20586 \begin_layout Description
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20591 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20595 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20598 \begin_layout Description
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20603 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20607 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20608 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20612 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20613 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20616 \begin_layout Standard
20620 \begin_inset space ~
20629 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20632 and works without problems.
20633 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20634 or specific OpenType fonts,
20635 you might want to try out
20638 \begin_inset space ~
20646 \begin_inset space ~
20652 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20661 \begin_inset Index idx
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20668 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 \begin_inset Index idx
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 \begin_layout Standard
20698 This file type has the extension
20699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20711 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20712 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20713 When \SpecialChar LyX
20715 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20716 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20722 between different formats,
20723 which are described in section
20725 Math Output in XHTML
20730 \begin_inset space ~
20738 \begin_layout Standard
20739 XHTML output remains
20740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20748 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20749 features are supported yet.
20753 and the World Wide Web
20758 Additional Features
20761 for more information.
20764 \begin_layout Standard
20765 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20767 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20768 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20774 \begin_layout Subsection
20776 \begin_inset Index idx
20781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20800 \begin_layout Standard
20801 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20802 with all of the page breaks in place,
20803 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20813 or use the toolbar button
20820 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20821 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20822 \begin_inset space ~
20826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20828 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20833 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20834 \begin_inset space ~
20838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20840 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20846 Further output formats can be selected via
20848 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20849 View (Other Formats)
20851 or the toolbar button
20860 \begin_layout Standard
20861 If you have changed your document,
20862 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20870 Update (Other Formats)
20876 \begin_layout Standard
20877 When you preview a file,
20878 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20879 's temporary directory.
20880 To have a real output,
20881 export your document.
20884 \begin_layout Section
20885 A few Words about Typography
20886 \begin_inset Index idx
20891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 \begin_layout Subsection
20902 Dashes and Minus Signs
20903 \begin_inset Index idx
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 \begin_inset Index idx
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 \begin_layout Standard
20930 In \SpecialChar LyX
20933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20944 symbol comes in four variants:
20965 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20971 \begin_layout Standard
20972 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20982 height_special "totalheight"
20987 backgroundcolor "none"
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 \begin_inset Tabular
20992 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
20993 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20994 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20995 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20996 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20997 <row interlinespace="3mm">
20998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21027 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21066 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21067 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 system key combination
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 the en dash is entered with
21098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21107 and the em dash with
21110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21123 is the Mac label for the right
21133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21146 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21147 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21170 system key combination or
21171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21185 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21198 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21237 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21243 \begin_layout Standard
21244 Dashes can also be inserted with
21246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21251 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21259 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21262 \begin_layout Standard
21263 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21264 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21265 Here are some examples:
21268 \begin_layout Enumerate
21269 line- and page-breaks
21270 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21280 \begin_layout Enumerate
21283 \begin_inset space ~
21287 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21297 \begin_layout Enumerate
21298 The em dash is used without spaces:
21301 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21311 \begin_layout Enumerate
21312 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21316 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21326 \begin_layout Standard
21328 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21330 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21331 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21339 \begin_layout Subsection
21340 Dashes and Line Breaks
21341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21343 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21350 \begin_layout Standard
21351 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21359 \begin_layout Itemize
21361 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21362 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21365 \begin_layout Itemize
21367 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21370 \begin_layout Itemize
21371 In French and Spanish,
21372 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21373 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21376 \begin_layout Standard
21378 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21379 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21390 allows line breaks after hyphens
21391 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21394 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21397 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21400 \begin_layout Enumerate
21401 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21402 \begin_inset space ~
21405 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21407 The Elements of Typographic Style
21410 \begin_inset space ~
21413 – can be prevented using
21414 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21416 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21422 \begin_layout Enumerate
21423 Unwanted line breaks
21428 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21430 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21433 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21440 Prevent Hyphenation
21445 \begin_inset space ~
21461 in \SpecialChar TeX
21463 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21466 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21468 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21470 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21471 space does not suffice
21475 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21482 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21483 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21484 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21497 \begin_layout Itemize
21499 \begin_inset space ~
21503 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21513 height_special "totalheight"
21518 backgroundcolor "none"
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 \begin_layout Itemize
21532 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21542 height_special "totalheight"
21547 backgroundcolor "none"
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21552 \begin_inset space ~
21560 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21561 \begin_inset space ~
21564 – sont très utiles.
21567 \begin_layout Itemize
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 un inciso con rayas—
21587 \begin_layout Standard
21588 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21589 \begin_inset space ~
21592 – in contrast to an overfull line
21593 \begin_inset space ~
21596 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21600 \begin_layout Standard
21601 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21602 you can select the option
21604 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21605 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21606 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21607 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21612 \begin_layout Enumerate
21613 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21614 They can be prevented using
21615 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21617 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21620 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21626 \begin_layout Itemize
21628 \begin_inset space ~
21631 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21632 \begin_inset space ~
21635 – sont très utiles.
21639 \begin_layout Enumerate
21640 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21641 \begin_inset Newline newline
21646 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21647 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21649 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21651 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21653 \begin_inset space ~
21659 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21661 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21663 \begin_inset space ~
21674 \begin_layout Itemize
21675 Em-dashes without spaces—
21676 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21677 common in American English—
21678 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21679 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21682 \begin_layout Standard
21683 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21684 \begin_inset space ~
21688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21690 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21702 \begin_layout Enumerate
21705 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21706 \begin_inset space ~
21710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21712 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21724 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21727 \begin_layout Standard
21728 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21730 \begin_inset space ~
21734 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21743 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21751 \begin_layout Standard
21752 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21754 \begin_inset space ~
21758 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21759 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21768 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21773 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21782 The behavior was changed since
21783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21801 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21802 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21810 \begin_layout Standard
21813 \begin_inset space ~
21821 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21823 \begin_inset space ~
21826 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21830 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21831 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21832 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21834 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21839 If you used both literal and
21840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21847 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21849 \begin_inset space ~
21853 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21856 \begin_layout Subsection
21858 \begin_inset Index idx
21863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21872 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21879 \begin_layout Standard
21880 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21881 but automatically in the output.
21882 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21888 \begin_inset Index idx
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21896 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 following the rules of the document language.
21912 does not hyphenate text in the
21916 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21919 \begin_layout Standard
21921 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21922 it only has problems with text in the
21926 font and with unusual constructs,
21928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21936 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21937 cannot break a word correctly,
21938 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21939 This is done with the menu
21941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21942 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21944 \begin_inset space ~
21950 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21952 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21957 \begin_layout Standard
21958 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
21959 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
21960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21969 would then see the hyphen
21970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21977 as a line break possibility.
21978 A line break at this point would look ugly.
21979 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
21981 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21983 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21989 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21991 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
21993 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
21998 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
22000 Prevent Hyphenation
22005 \begin_inset space ~
22013 \begin_layout Subsection
22015 \begin_inset Index idx
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22030 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22033 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22040 \begin_layout Standard
22041 When \SpecialChar LyX
22042 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22043 to generate the final version of your document,
22045 automatically distinguishes between words,
22050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22053 appropriate amount of space.
22054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22057 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22058 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22061 \begin_layout Standard
22063 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22073 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22076 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22077 it's the end of a sentence;
22078 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22079 it's an abbreviation.
22082 \begin_layout Standard
22083 Here are some examples of
22087 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22090 \begin_layout Itemize
22095 \begin_layout Itemize
22100 \begin_layout Standard
22101 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22104 \begin_layout Itemize
22106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22110 this is too much space!
22113 \begin_layout Itemize
22118 \begin_layout Standard
22119 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22123 To fix this problem,
22124 use one of the following:
22127 \begin_layout Enumerate
22131 \begin_inset space ~
22136 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22137 \begin_inset space ~
22141 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22145 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22151 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22155 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22163 \begin_inset Index idx
22168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22170 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 \begin_layout Enumerate
22191 \begin_inset space ~
22196 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22197 \begin_inset space ~
22201 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22203 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22209 \begin_inset Index idx
22214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22216 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22233 \begin_layout Enumerate
22237 \begin_inset space ~
22241 \begin_inset space ~
22245 \begin_inset space ~
22252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22254 \begin_inset space ~
22259 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22260 This function is also bound to
22263 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22269 \begin_layout Standard
22270 With the corrections,
22271 our earlier examples look like this:
22274 \begin_layout Itemize
22276 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22280 \begin_inset space \space{}
22283 this is too much space!
22286 \begin_layout Itemize
22287 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22291 \begin_layout Standard
22292 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22293 If your language is such a language,
22294 you don't need to worry,
22295 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22296 will take care of this.
22299 \begin_layout Standard
22300 For those that do need to bother,
22301 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22305 \begin_inset space ~
22311 feature described in the section
22313 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22318 Additional Features
22323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22325 \begin_inset Index idx
22330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22347 \begin_inset Index idx
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 \begin_layout Standard
22373 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22375 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22376 and use a closing mark at the end.
22379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22387 The keyboard character,
22393 generates this automatically.
22396 \begin_layout Standard
22397 You can specify what character the
22401 key produces by using the submenu
22407 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22411 \begin_inset Index idx
22416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22418 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 dialog and switching the
22436 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22437 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22439 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22441 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22445 \begin_inset space ~
22451 \begin_layout Labeling
22452 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22464 \begin_inset space ~
22468 \begin_inset space ~
22472 \begin_inset Quotes els
22476 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22490 \begin_inset Quotes els
22494 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22497 quotation marks (as common,
22499 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22506 \begin_layout Labeling
22507 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22510 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22514 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22518 \begin_inset space ~
22522 \begin_inset space ~
22526 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22530 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22536 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22540 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22544 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22548 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22551 quotation marks (as common,
22553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22560 \begin_layout Labeling
22561 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22564 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22568 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22572 \begin_inset space ~
22576 \begin_inset space ~
22580 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22584 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22590 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22594 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22598 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22602 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22605 quotation marks (as common,
22607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22614 \begin_layout Labeling
22615 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22618 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22622 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22626 \begin_inset space ~
22630 \begin_inset space ~
22634 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22638 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22644 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22648 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22652 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22656 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22659 quotation marks (as common,
22661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22668 \begin_layout Labeling
22669 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22672 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22676 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22680 \begin_inset space ~
22684 \begin_inset space ~
22688 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22692 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22698 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22702 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22706 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22710 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22713 quotation marks (as common,
22715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22722 \begin_layout Labeling
22723 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22726 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22730 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22734 \begin_inset space ~
22738 \begin_inset space ~
22742 \begin_inset Quotes als
22746 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22752 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22756 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22760 \begin_inset Quotes als
22764 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22767 quotation marks (as common,
22769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22776 \begin_layout Labeling
22777 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22780 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22784 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22788 \begin_inset space ~
22792 \begin_inset space ~
22796 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22800 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22806 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22810 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22814 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22818 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22821 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22824 \begin_layout Labeling
22825 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22828 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22832 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22836 \begin_inset space ~
22840 \begin_inset space ~
22844 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22848 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22854 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22858 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22862 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22866 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22869 quotation marks (as common,
22871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22878 \begin_layout Labeling
22879 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22882 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22886 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22890 \begin_inset space ~
22894 \begin_inset space ~
22898 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22902 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22908 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22912 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22916 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22920 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22923 quotation marks (as common,
22925 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22932 \begin_layout Labeling
22933 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22936 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22940 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22944 \begin_inset space ~
22948 \begin_inset space ~
22952 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22956 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22962 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22966 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22970 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22974 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22977 quotation marks (another style common in France)
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
22983 since these look identical to the inner marks.
22984 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
22992 \begin_layout Labeling
22993 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22996 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23000 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23004 \begin_inset space ~
23008 \begin_inset space ~
23012 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23016 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23022 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23026 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23030 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23034 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23037 quotation marks (as common,
23039 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23046 \begin_layout Labeling
23047 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23050 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23054 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23058 \begin_inset space ~
23062 \begin_inset space ~
23066 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23070 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23076 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23080 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23084 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23088 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23091 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23092 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23096 \begin_layout Labeling
23097 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23099 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23102 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23106 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23110 \begin_inset space ~
23114 \begin_inset space ~
23118 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23122 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23130 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23138 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23146 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23154 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23159 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23164 \begin_layout Labeling
23165 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23166 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23174 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23180 \begin_inset space ~
23184 \begin_inset space ~
23190 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23198 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23202 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23206 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23210 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23214 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23217 quotation marks (as common,
23219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23229 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23232 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23238 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23246 \begin_layout Labeling
23247 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23248 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23256 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23262 \begin_inset space ~
23266 \begin_inset space ~
23272 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23280 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23284 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23288 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23292 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23296 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23299 quotation marks (as common,
23301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23305 in North Korea and China)
23306 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23308 \begin_inset script superscript
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23315 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23331 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23347 \begin_layout Standard
23348 Inner quotation marks
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 In many writing cultures,
23354 these are single quotation marks.
23355 But as the British and French styles show,
23356 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23364 does not necessarily mean
23365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23373 This is why we call them
23374 \begin_inset Quotes els
23378 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23394 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23396 \begin_inset Quotes els
23400 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23403 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23406 arg "quote-insert inner"
23411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23417 \begin_layout Standard
23419 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23421 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23422 even if the document-wide style changes.
23423 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23424 If you check the setting
23426 Use dynamic quotation marks
23430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23431 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23436 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23437 they appear in a special color).
23438 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23439 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23444 if your publisher requests a different style).
23447 \begin_layout Standard
23448 Individual quotation marks (i.
23449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23453 their level [inner,
23457 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23460 \begin_layout Subsection
23462 \begin_inset Index idx
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23484 \begin_inset Index idx
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23508 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23515 \begin_layout Standard
23516 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23517 These groups are known as
23522 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23523 knows about ligatures,
23524 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23525 Here are the standard ligatures:
23528 \begin_layout Itemize
23532 \begin_layout Itemize
23536 \begin_layout Itemize
23540 \begin_layout Itemize
23544 \begin_layout Itemize
23548 \begin_layout Standard
23549 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23554 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23555 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23561 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23564 it looks really weird in compound words,
23566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23581 To break a ligature,
23584 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23585 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23587 \begin_inset space ~
23594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23605 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23622 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23630 \begin_layout Subsection
23632 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23634 \begin_inset Index idx
23639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 \begin_layout Standard
23662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23663 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23668 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23671 \begin_layout Description
23673 The name of the game.
23676 \begin_layout Description
23678 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23682 \begin_layout Description
23684 The \SpecialChar TeX
23685 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23689 \begin_layout Description
23690 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23691 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23695 \begin_layout Standard
23696 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23702 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23710 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23711 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23712 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23713 converges to the number
23714 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23718 The actual version is
23719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23728 the previous one was
23729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23740 \begin_layout Subsection
23742 \begin_inset Index idx
23747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23749 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23767 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23768 As you can see in the example below,
23769 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23778 for units use the menu
23780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23781 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23783 \begin_inset space ~
23791 arg "space-insert thin"
23797 \begin_layout Standard
23798 Here is an example to show the differences:
23801 \begin_layout Standard
23802 \begin_inset Tabular
23803 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23804 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23805 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23806 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23813 \begin_inset space ~
23817 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23829 space between number and unit
23836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23845 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23857 half space between number and unit
23870 \begin_layout Subsection
23872 \begin_inset Index idx
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 \begin_layout Standard
23897 In the early days of word processors,
23898 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
23899 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
23900 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
23901 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
23902 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
23903 These bits of text became known as
23914 \begin_layout Standard
23917 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
23918 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
23919 But what about widows and orphans,
23920 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
23921 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
23922 governing page breaks,
23923 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
23924 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
23925 you can add the commands
23926 \begin_inset Newline newline
23934 \begin_inset Newline newline
23942 \begin_inset Newline newline
23945 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23946 preamble of your document to avoid them.
23947 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
23949 \begin_inset space ~
23953 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23955 key "latexcompanion"
23961 \begin_inset space ~
23965 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
23972 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23973 's page break mechanism.
23976 \begin_layout Chapter
23980 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23982 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
23989 \begin_layout Standard
23990 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23993 \begin_inset space ~
23999 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24002 \begin_layout Section
24004 \begin_inset Index idx
24009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24025 \begin_layout Standard
24027 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24030 \begin_layout Description
24033 \begin_inset space ~
24036 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24037 \begin_inset Newline newline
24041 \begin_inset Note Note
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24053 \begin_layout Description
24054 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24055 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24058 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24059 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24061 \begin_inset space ~
24067 \begin_inset Newline newline
24071 \begin_inset Note Comment
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24075 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24084 \begin_layout Description
24086 \begin_inset space ~
24089 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24091 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24093 \begin_inset space ~
24099 \begin_inset Newline newline
24103 \begin_inset Newline newline
24107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24117 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24122 of a comment that appears in the output.
24128 \begin_inset Newline newline
24132 \begin_inset Newline newline
24135 As you can see in the example,
24136 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24140 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24152 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24155 \begin_layout Section
24157 \begin_inset Index idx
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24171 name "sec:Footnotes"
24178 \begin_layout Standard
24180 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24181 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24186 or the toolbar button
24189 arg "footnote-insert"
24203 \begin_inset Graphics
24204 filename clipart/footnote.png
24213 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24214 's representation of your footnote.
24224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24248 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24249 Clicking on the box label again will close
24262 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24263 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24278 \begin_layout Standard
24279 Here is an example footnote:
24287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 To close a footnote,
24289 click on the footnote box label.
24297 \begin_layout Standard
24298 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24299 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24300 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24301 according to the document class.
24303 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24304 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24310 ey are described in the
24313 \begin_inset space ~
24321 \begin_layout Section
24323 \begin_inset Index idx
24328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24337 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24344 \begin_layout Standard
24345 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24347 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24349 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24351 \begin_inset space ~
24356 or the toolbar button
24359 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24386 appearing within your text.
24387 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24388 's representation of your margin
24397 \begin_layout Standard
24398 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24402 \begin_inset Marginal
24405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24407 This is a marginal note.
24415 \begin_layout Standard
24416 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24417 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24418 right on odd pages.
24421 \begin_layout Standard
24422 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24425 \begin_inset space ~
24433 \begin_inset space ~
24441 \begin_layout Section
24442 Graphics and Images
24443 \begin_inset Index idx
24448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 \begin_inset Index idx
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24469 name "sec:Graphics"
24476 \begin_layout Standard
24477 To insert an image in your document,
24478 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24481 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24490 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24493 \begin_layout Standard
24494 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24499 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24500 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24501 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24502 \begin_inset space ~
24506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24508 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24516 \begin_layout Standard
24521 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24522 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24525 \begin_inset space ~
24529 \begin_inset space ~
24538 \begin_inset space ~
24542 \begin_inset space ~
24546 \begin_inset space ~
24551 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24552 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24559 \begin_layout Standard
24563 \begin_inset space ~
24567 \begin_inset space ~
24572 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24573 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24575 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24580 \begin_inset space ~
24585 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24586 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24589 \begin_layout Standard
24590 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24591 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24592 This is an example image within a separate,
24593 horizontally centered paragraph:
24596 \begin_layout Standard
24598 \begin_inset Graphics
24599 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24607 \begin_layout Standard
24608 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24609 you have to put the image into a float,
24611 \begin_inset space ~
24615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24617 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24625 \begin_layout Subsection
24627 \begin_inset Index idx
24632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24634 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24649 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24651 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24658 \begin_layout Standard
24659 You can insert images in any known file format.
24660 But as we explained in section
24661 \begin_inset space ~
24665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24667 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24673 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24675 therefore uses the program
24679 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24680 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24681 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24682 \begin_inset space ~
24686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24688 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24696 \begin_layout Standard
24697 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24700 \begin_layout Description
24702 \begin_inset space ~
24705 images consist of pixel values,
24706 often in a compressed form.
24707 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24708 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24712 Graphics Interchange Format
24713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24730 \begin_inset Index idx
24735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24737 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24756 Portable Network Graphics
24757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24774 \begin_inset Index idx
24779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24800 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24830 \begin_inset Index idx
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24837 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 \begin_layout Description
24856 \begin_inset space ~
24859 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
24860 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
24861 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
24862 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
24863 \begin_inset Newline newline
24866 Scalable image formats can be
24867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24870 Scalable Vector Graphics
24871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24888 \begin_inset Index idx
24893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24914 Encapsulated PostScript
24915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24932 \begin_inset Index idx
24937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24939 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24958 Portable Document Format
24959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24976 \begin_inset Index idx
24981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24997 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
24998 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25003 In the case of PDF,
25004 the original image is additionally compressed.
25012 \begin_layout Standard
25013 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25021 \begin_layout Subsection
25022 Grouping of Image Settings
25023 \begin_inset Index idx
25028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25030 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25049 Images within such a group share their settings,
25050 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25051 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25054 \begin_layout Standard
25055 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25058 \begin_inset space ~
25062 \begin_inset space ~
25074 \begin_inset space ~
25078 \begin_inset space ~
25084 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25087 \begin_layout Section
25089 \begin_inset Index idx
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25110 \begin_layout Standard
25111 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25114 arg "tabular-insert"
25119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25123 A dialog will appear,
25124 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25125 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25127 and you can select a specific (border) style
25130 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25131 This separation appears due to a double line:
25132 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25133 Here is an example table:
25136 \begin_layout Standard
25138 \begin_inset Tabular
25139 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25140 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25143 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25342 \begin_layout Standard
25344 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25345 This corresponds to the
25346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25353 table style listed in the style selection.
25356 \begin_layout Standard
25358 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25359 Other available styles include:
25362 \begin_layout Itemize
25364 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25373 which looks line the above table,
25374 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25377 \begin_layout Itemize
25379 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25380 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25383 \begin_layout Itemize
25385 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25394 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25405 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25406 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25411 \begin_layout Standard
25413 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25414 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25416 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25417 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25421 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25422 you should alter this setting.
25425 \begin_layout Subsection
25429 \begin_layout Standard
25430 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25432 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25436 This brings up the table dialog.
25437 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25438 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25439 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25440 This means that if you select more cells,
25441 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25444 \begin_layout Standard
25445 In addition to the table dialog,
25449 \begin_inset space ~
25454 helps you in setting table properties.
25455 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25458 \begin_layout Standard
25462 \begin_inset space ~
25467 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25468 If you add a row or column,
25469 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25470 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25471 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25473 \begin_inset space ~
25477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25479 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25487 \begin_layout Standard
25488 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25497 This will merge the cells to
25502 spread over more than one column/row.
25503 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25504 so that the alignment,
25506 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25507 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25510 \begin_layout Standard
25512 \begin_inset Tabular
25513 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25514 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25515 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25516 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25517 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25518 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25529 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 \begin_layout Standard
25650 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25651 -arguments for the table.
25652 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25653 such as the multirow cells,
25654 explained in the chapter
25661 \begin_inset space ~
25667 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25668 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25669 but are visible in the output.
25672 \begin_layout Standard
25673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25682 Most DVI-viewers are
25686 able to display rotations.
25694 \begin_layout Standard
25699 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25704 adds lines for all cell borders.
25707 \begin_layout Subsection
25709 \begin_inset Index idx
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 \begin_inset Index idx
25736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 \begin_layout Standard
25746 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25747 you can use the option
25750 \begin_inset space ~
25754 \begin_inset space ~
25762 \begin_inset space ~
25767 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25768 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25771 \begin_layout Description
25777 The current row and all rows above,
25778 that don't have any special options defined,
25779 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25780 Except for the first page,
25784 \begin_inset space ~
25792 \begin_layout Description
25796 \begin_inset space ~
25802 The current row and all rows above,
25803 that don't have any special options defined,
25804 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25807 \begin_layout Description
25813 The current row and all rows below,
25814 that don't have any special options defined,
25815 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25816 except for the last page,
25820 \begin_inset space ~
25828 \begin_layout Description
25832 \begin_inset space ~
25838 The current row and all rows below,
25839 that don't have any special options defined,
25840 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
25843 \begin_layout Description
25845 The first row is reset as a single column.
25846 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
25848 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25852 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
25855 \begin_inset space ~
25863 \begin_layout Standard
25864 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
25865 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
25866 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
25867 the others will be defined as
25873 first means first in this order:
25878 \begin_inset space ~
25892 \begin_inset space ~
25898 see the following longtable to see how it works:
25901 \begin_layout Standard
25903 \begin_inset Tabular
25904 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
25905 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
25906 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
25907 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25908 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25909 <row endfirsthead="true">
25910 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25916 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
25921 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25930 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25940 <row endfirsthead="true">
25941 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25952 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25973 <row endhead="true">
25974 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25994 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26004 <row endhead="true">
26005 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26025 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26037 <row endfoot="true">
26038 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26049 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26058 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27031 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27049 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27743 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27805 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27836 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27867 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27898 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27929 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27960 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27991 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28021 <row endlastfoot="true">
28022 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28033 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28059 \begin_layout Subsection
28061 \begin_inset Index idx
28066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28068 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28085 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28092 \begin_layout Standard
28093 A table cell can contain text,
28097 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28098 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28099 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28105 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28109 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28110 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28111 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28115 \begin_layout Standard
28117 \begin_inset Tabular
28118 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28119 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28120 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28121 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28142 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28211 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28267 This is longer now.
28272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28323 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28324 This is longer now.
28329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28355 \begin_layout Standard
28356 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28357 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28362 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28367 Selection with the mouse or with
28371 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28372 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28375 \begin_layout Section
28377 \begin_inset Index idx
28382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28398 \begin_layout Subsection
28402 \begin_layout Standard
28403 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28404 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28413 forward or backward a page or two,
28414 to wherever it fits best.
28422 \begin_inset space ~
28428 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28431 \begin_layout Standard
28432 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28433 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28434 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28435 every float can be referenced in the text.
28436 Floats are therefore numbered.
28437 Referencing is described in section
28438 \begin_inset space ~
28442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28444 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28452 \begin_layout Standard
28456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28460 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28461 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28462 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28463 \begin_inset Index idx
28468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28470 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28485 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28486 -document readable,
28487 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28488 A closed float box looks like this:
28490 \begin_inset Graphics
28491 filename clipart/float.png
28496 – a gray button with a red label.
28499 \begin_layout Standard
28500 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28501 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28504 \begin_layout Subsection
28506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28508 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28513 \begin_inset Index idx
28518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28520 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28537 \begin_layout Standard
28539 \begin_inset space ~
28543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28545 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28550 was created using the menu
28552 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28553 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28559 arg "float-insert figure"
28563 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28565 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28571 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28575 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28577 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28579 \begin_inset space ~
28587 arg "layout-paragraph"
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28594 \begin_inset Float figure
28601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28603 \begin_inset Graphics
28604 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28619 name "fig:A-star-in"
28636 \begin_layout Standard
28637 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28638 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28640 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28649 ) and refer to it using the menu
28651 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28657 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28661 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28671 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28672 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28682 For more about cross-references,
28684 \begin_inset space ~
28688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28690 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28698 \begin_layout Standard
28699 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28700 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28701 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28702 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28703 \begin_inset space ~
28707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28709 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28716 \begin_inset space ~
28720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28722 reference "fig:Two-images"
28727 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28728 You can also set the images one below the other.
28730 \begin_inset space ~
28734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28736 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28744 reference "fig:Star"
28749 are the subfigures.
28752 \begin_layout Standard
28753 \begin_inset Float figure
28760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28761 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28765 \begin_inset Float figure
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28773 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28778 name "fig:Undefinable"
28790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28791 \begin_inset Graphics
28792 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28804 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28808 \begin_inset Float figure
28815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28816 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28834 \begin_inset Graphics
28835 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28847 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28854 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28859 name "fig:Two-images"
28876 \begin_layout Subsection
28878 \begin_inset Index idx
28883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28885 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28903 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
28905 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28906 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28909 or the toolbar button
28912 arg "float-insert table"
28916 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
28918 \begin_inset space ~
28922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28924 reference "tab:Table-float"
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28933 \begin_inset Float table
28940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28941 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28946 name "tab:Table-float"
28958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28960 \begin_inset Tabular
28961 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
28962 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28963 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28965 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29092 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29113 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29116 \end{array}\right]$
29124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29137 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29158 \begin_layout Subsection
29160 \begin_inset Index idx
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29167 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29184 \begin_layout Standard
29186 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29187 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29188 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29189 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29196 \begin_inset space ~
29204 \begin_layout Section
29206 \begin_inset Index idx
29211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29220 \begin_layout Standard
29222 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29225 all the usual rules of indentation,
29228 \begin_inset space \space{}
29234 \begin_layout Standard
29235 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29236 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29242 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29245 \begin_layout Standard
29247 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29257 height_special "totalheight"
29262 backgroundcolor "none"
29265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29268 This is a minipage.
29269 The text is set in an italic style.
29272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29275 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29283 \begin_layout Standard
29284 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29287 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29292 as described in section
29293 \begin_inset space ~
29297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29299 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29305 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29311 \begin_layout Standard
29312 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29322 height_special "totalheight"
29327 backgroundcolor "none"
29330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29331 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29332 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29338 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29342 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29352 height_special "totalheight"
29357 backgroundcolor "none"
29360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29362 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29370 \begin_layout Standard
29371 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29377 \begin_layout Standard
29378 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29379 you can transform the box to another box type.
29380 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29395 \begin_layout Chapter
29396 Mathematical Formulas
29397 \begin_inset Index idx
29402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29409 \begin_inset Index idx
29414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29416 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29433 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29440 \begin_layout Standard
29441 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29446 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29449 \begin_layout Section
29451 \begin_inset Index idx
29456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29458 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29475 \begin_layout Standard
29476 To create a math formula,
29477 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29490 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29491 with purple markers around its corners.
29492 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29493 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29494 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29496 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29502 \begin_layout Standard
29503 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29506 \begin_inset space ~
29512 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29515 \begin_layout Standard
29516 There are two main types of formulas,
29517 inline formulas and display formulas.
29518 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29522 \begin_layout Standard
29523 This is a line with an inline formula
29524 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29530 \begin_layout Standard
29531 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29533 \begin_inset Formula
29540 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29543 \begin_layout Standard
29545 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29563 followed by a space,
29564 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29565 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29569 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29572 \begin_inset space ~
29580 \begin_layout Subsection
29581 Navigating in Formulas
29582 \begin_inset Index idx
29587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29589 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29606 \begin_layout Standard
29607 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29609 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29610 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29615 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29616 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29621 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29626 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29629 \end{array}\right]$
29637 will leave the formula,
29638 placing the cursor after the formula.
29643 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29645 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29648 \begin_layout Standard
29654 printed in this document as
29655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29659 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29667 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29668 since it does not add a space between characters,
29669 but it does exit a nested structure.
29671 you have to be careful about using
29678 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29687 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29697 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29701 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29707 since in the latter case only the
29710 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29715 will be under the square root sign:
29717 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29724 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29726 partially filled in,
29728 \begin_inset Formula
29730 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29739 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29740 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29741 the results will be unpredictable,
29742 but most constructs don't mind.
29745 \begin_layout Subsection
29749 \begin_layout Standard
29750 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29751 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29756 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29757 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29759 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29760 That text can then be cut or copied,
29761 and then pasted within any formula,
29762 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29766 \begin_layout Subsection
29767 Exponents and Subscripts
29768 \begin_inset Index idx
29773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29775 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29790 \begin_inset Index idx
29795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29818 arg "math-superscript"
29824 arg "math-subscript"
29828 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29830 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29837 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29847 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
29854 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
29859 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
29866 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29872 If you use characters in the superscript,
29873 that could be accented with the circumflex
29874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29882 you have to use an extra
29886 to separate the circumflex and the character.
29889 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
29896 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29902 Subscripts are similar:
29904 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
29911 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29919 \begin_layout Subsection
29921 \begin_inset Index idx
29926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29928 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29946 Create a fraction either with the command
29952 or by using the icon
29955 arg "math-insert \\frac"
29961 \begin_inset space ~
29967 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
29968 The cursor is above the fraction line.
29969 To move it to the bottom,
29981 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
29982 as this example shows:
29983 \begin_inset Formula
29985 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
29988 \end{array}\right)}\right]
29996 \begin_layout Subsection
29998 \begin_inset Index idx
30003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30005 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30022 \begin_layout Standard
30023 Roots can be created using the
30026 \begin_inset space ~
30034 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30040 arg "math-insert \\root"
30062 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30070 always produces a square root.
30073 \begin_layout Subsection
30074 Operators with Limits
30075 \begin_inset Index idx
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30097 \begin_inset Index idx
30102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30121 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30128 \begin_layout Standard
30130 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30134 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30137 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30138 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30139 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30140 directly after the symbol.
30141 The sum operator will automatically place its
30142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30149 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30150 and to the side in inline formulas,
30152 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30157 \begin_inset Formula
30159 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30166 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30170 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30171 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30173 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30174 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30176 \begin_inset space ~
30180 \begin_inset space ~
30194 \begin_layout Standard
30195 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30205 \begin_inset Index idx
30210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30212 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30227 \begin_inset Formula
30229 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30234 which will place the
30235 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30247 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30249 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30255 \begin_layout Standard
30256 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30263 Have a look at section
30264 \begin_inset space ~
30268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30270 reference "subsec:Functions"
30275 for an explanation of function macros.
30278 \begin_layout Subsection
30280 \begin_inset Index idx
30285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30305 Most math symbols can be found in the
30308 \begin_inset space ~
30313 under one of several categories;
30334 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30337 \begin_layout Standard
30338 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30339 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30340 you don't have to use the
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30349 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30351 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30354 \begin_layout Subsection
30356 \begin_inset Index idx
30361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30363 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 \begin_layout Standard
30381 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30387 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30393 \begin_inset space ~
30401 arg "math-insert \\space"
30405 This generates a small space,
30406 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30414 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30417 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30419 \begin_inset Graphics
30420 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30425 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30426 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30427 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30429 because they are negative spaces.
30430 Here are two examples:
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30444 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30450 \begin_layout Standard
30461 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30467 \begin_layout Subsection
30469 \begin_inset Index idx
30474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30476 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30493 name "subsec:Functions"
30500 \begin_layout Standard
30504 \begin_inset space ~
30509 contains under the button
30512 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30515 a number of function macros,
30517 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30522 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30531 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30538 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30540 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30544 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30550 \begin_layout Standard
30551 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30553 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30557 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30563 \begin_layout Standard
30564 For some mathematical objects,
30566 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30567 as described in section
30568 \begin_inset space ~
30572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30574 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30582 \begin_layout Subsection
30584 \begin_inset Index idx
30589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30610 This may depend on your keyboard,
30611 or the bindings file you use.
30612 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30616 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30619 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30620 Our example is entered by typing
30625 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30632 \begin_inset space ~
30636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30638 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30643 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30646 \begin_layout Standard
30647 \begin_inset Float table
30654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30655 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30660 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30664 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30674 \begin_inset Tabular
30675 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30676 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30677 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30678 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30763 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30871 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
30881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
30935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30979 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
30989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31033 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31087 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31141 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31195 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31240 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31261 \begin_layout Standard
31262 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31265 \begin_inset space ~
31273 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31277 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31280 \begin_layout Section
31281 Brackets and Delimiters
31282 \begin_inset Index idx
31287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31289 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31304 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31311 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31328 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31335 \begin_layout Standard
31336 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31339 using just the keys
31344 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31345 like a matrix or a fraction,
31346 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31347 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31350 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31355 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31356 \begin_inset Formula
31358 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31366 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31368 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31371 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31374 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31380 \begin_inset Formula
31382 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31390 \begin_layout Standard
31391 If you use the delimiter icon,
31393 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31396 \begin_layout Standard
31397 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31398 If you use the option
31401 \begin_inset space ~
31407 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31408 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31410 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31416 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31417 with a dotted line,
31418 but nothing will be printed.
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31422 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31423 like a square root,
31424 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31425 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31430 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31433 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31435 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31436 select the structure and enter
31439 arg "math-delim ( )"
31445 \begin_layout Section
31446 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31447 \begin_inset Index idx
31452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31469 \begin_inset Index idx
31474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31476 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31491 \begin_inset Index idx
31496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31498 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31502 Multi-line Equations
31515 \begin_layout Standard
31516 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31520 \begin_inset space ~
31528 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31532 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31533 Here is an example:
31534 \begin_inset Formula
31536 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31545 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31546 but you can add them as described in section
31547 \begin_inset space ~
31551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31553 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31559 When you construct the matrix,
31560 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31562 or center-justified.
31563 This alignment is set in the box
31568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31619 for every column as default.
31622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31633 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31634 the second will be centered,
31635 and the third column will be right-justified,
31636 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31637 The result will look like this:
31638 \begin_inset Formula
31641 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31642 column & has & has\,right\\
31643 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31652 \begin_layout Standard
31653 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31656 arg "newline-insert newline"
31659 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31660 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31662 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31665 or the math toolbar.
31668 \begin_layout Standard
31669 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31670 such as distinctions of cases.
31671 It can be created with the menu
31673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31674 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31688 Here is an example:
31690 \begin_inset Formula
31704 \begin_layout Standard
31705 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31708 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31711 arg "newline-insert newline"
31715 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31716 one for each column.
31720 arg "newline-insert newline"
31723 in a non-empty formula,
31724 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31732 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31733 the relation sign is in the second column,
31734 and the rest in the third column.
31735 A new row is created by every further entry of
31738 arg "newline-insert newline"
31742 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31743 Here is an example:
31744 \begin_inset Formula
31746 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31747 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31752 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31753 \begin_inset Formula
31755 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31763 \begin_layout Standard
31764 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31771 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31772 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31775 reference "eq:asquared"
31781 The other types are described in section
31782 \begin_inset space ~
31786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31788 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31796 \begin_layout Section
31797 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31798 \begin_inset Index idx
31803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31820 \begin_inset Index idx
31825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 Referencing formulas
31842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31844 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31851 \begin_layout Standard
31852 To number a formula,
31853 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
31855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31856 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31858 \begin_inset space ~
31862 \begin_inset space ~
31870 arg "math-number-toggle"
31874 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31875 within parentheses.
31876 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
31877 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
31878 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
31879 separated by a dot:
31880 \begin_inset Formula
31890 arg "math-number-toggle"
31893 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
31894 You can only number displayed formulas.
31897 \begin_layout Standard
31898 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
31901 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31902 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31904 \begin_inset space ~
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31916 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
31919 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
31920 \begin_inset Formula
31923 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
31929 To number all lines use the shortcut
31932 arg "math-number-toggle"
31938 \begin_layout Standard
31939 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31942 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
31943 A label is inserted with the menu
31945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31954 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
31955 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
31956 It is recommended that you use the suggested
31957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31968 as the first part of the label,
31969 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
31970 We inserted in the following example the label
31971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31978 in the second line:
31979 \begin_inset Formula
31981 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
31982 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
31987 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
31988 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
31989 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
31991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31993 \begin_inset space ~
32001 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32005 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32006 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32007 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32011 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32014 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32022 \begin_layout Standard
32023 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32024 's cross-reference box are described in section
32025 \begin_inset space ~
32029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32031 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32038 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32045 \begin_layout Section
32046 User defined math macros
32047 \begin_inset Index idx
32052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32054 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32071 \begin_layout Standard
32073 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32074 Math macros are explained in section
32077 \begin_inset space ~
32089 \begin_layout Section
32093 \begin_layout Subsection
32095 \begin_inset Index idx
32100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32102 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32119 \begin_layout Standard
32120 The standard font for text is italic,
32121 for numbers the standard is roman.
32122 To set a font in a formula,
32126 \begin_inset space ~
32134 arg "math-insert \\font"
32138 or enter its command,
32140 \begin_inset space ~
32144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32146 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32155 \begin_layout Standard
32156 \begin_inset Float table
32163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32164 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32169 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32173 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32183 \begin_inset Tabular
32184 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32185 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32187 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32219 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32246 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32273 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32306 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32333 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32355 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32361 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32362 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32375 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32391 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32425 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32447 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32453 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32461 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32474 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32490 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 \begin_layout Standard
32525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32534 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32537 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32540 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32544 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32564 \begin_layout Standard
32565 When you use a typeface,
32566 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32567 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32572 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32573 so that you have to use a
32574 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32576 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32579 space when you need a space in the box.
32580 Here is an example where
32581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32592 denotes the set of numbers:
32593 \begin_inset Formula
32595 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32604 The typefaces are nestable,
32605 which can cause confusion.
32618 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32622 \begin_inset Newline newline
32625 So it is better not to use this feature.
32628 \begin_layout Standard
32629 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32631 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32635 \begin_inset Newline newline
32638 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32645 which works like the other typeface commands:
32647 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32653 \begin_layout Standard
32660 works for all symbols,
32665 \begin_layout Standard
32666 A number of other font options are available as well,
32669 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32670 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32672 \begin_inset space ~
32680 \begin_layout Subsection
32682 \begin_inset Index idx
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32689 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 \begin_layout Standard
32707 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32709 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32710 which is obtained using the entry
32713 \begin_inset space ~
32717 \begin_inset space ~
32725 \begin_inset space ~
32733 arg "math-insert \\font"
32737 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32738 in black instead of blue.
32739 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32740 Here is an example:
32741 \begin_inset Formula
32744 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32745 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32754 \begin_layout Subsection
32756 \begin_inset Index idx
32761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32763 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32780 \begin_layout Standard
32781 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32782 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32803 For most characters,
32812 are actually the same size,
32814 superscripts and subscripts,
32815 and certain other structures,
32821 Except for some operators,
32822 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32823 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32824 thinks are appropriate.
32825 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32828 arg "math-insert \\style"
32832 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32835 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32839 which is normally in
32850 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
32854 The four styles are used in the following example:
32857 \begin_layout Standard
32858 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
32863 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
32868 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
32873 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32880 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
32882 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32890 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
32892 if the base font size of the document is changed,
32893 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
32894 As an example here is a formula in the font size
32895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32905 \begin_layout Standard
32909 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
32915 \begin_layout Section
32916 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32918 \begin_inset Index idx
32923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32930 \begin_inset Index idx
32935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32954 \begin_layout Standard
32956 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
32959 \begin_layout Subsection
32960 Enabling AMS-Support
32963 \begin_layout Standard
32964 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
32965 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
32981 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
32982 selecting the checkbox
32985 \begin_inset space ~
32989 \begin_inset space ~
32993 \begin_inset space ~
33002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33006 \begin_inset Index idx
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33030 \begin_inset space ~
33036 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33037 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33038 -errors in formulas,
33039 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33042 \begin_layout Subsection
33044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33046 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33051 \begin_inset Index idx
33056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33062 Multi-line Equations
33075 \begin_layout Standard
33076 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33077 provides a selection of different formula types.
33079 allows you to choose between
33104 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33114 for an explanation of these formula types.
33117 \begin_layout Chapter
33121 \begin_layout Section
33123 \begin_inset Index idx
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33137 name "sec:Cross-References"
33144 \begin_layout Standard
33145 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33146 's strengths is cross-references.
33147 You can reference every section,
33151 and list in the document.
33152 To reference a document part,
33153 you have to insert a label into it.
33154 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33155 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33158 \begin_layout Enumerate
33162 \begin_layout Enumerate
33163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33165 name "enu:Second-item"
33172 \begin_layout Enumerate
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33177 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33179 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33182 or by pressing the toolbar button
33189 A gray label box like this:
33191 \begin_inset Graphics
33192 filename clipart/label.png
33196 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33198 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33199 in our case the text
33200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33233 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33235 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33236 the suggested prefix will be
33237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33251 \begin_layout Standard
33252 To reference the item,
33253 we refer to its label using the menu
33255 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33258 or the toolbar button
33261 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33265 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33267 \begin_inset Graphics
33268 filename clipart/reference.png
33272 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33273 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33286 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33289 \begin_layout Standard
33290 As an alternative to
33292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33296 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33301 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33303 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33316 Here is our cross-reference:
33318 \begin_inset space ~
33322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33324 reference "enu:Second-item"
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33333 It is recommended to use a
33334 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33336 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33344 described in section
33345 \begin_inset space ~
33349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33351 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33361 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33364 \begin_layout Standard
33365 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33368 \begin_layout Description
33371 this is the default:
33373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33375 reference "fig:Two-images"
33383 \begin_layout Description
33385 prints the number within two parentheses,
33386 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33387 especially when the reference name
33388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33399 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33407 \begin_layout Description
33409 prints the page number:
33411 \begin_inset space ~
33415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33416 LatexCommand pageref
33417 reference "fig:Two-images"
33425 \begin_layout Description
33427 \begin_inset space ~
33431 \begin_inset space ~
33435 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33438 LatexCommand vpageref
33439 reference "fig:Two-images"
33445 \begin_inset Newline newline
33448 If the label is on the same page,
33449 it prints “on this page”;
33450 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33451 it prints “on the facing page”;
33452 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33453 it prints “on the previous page”;
33454 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33455 it prints “on the next page”.
33456 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33459 \begin_layout Description
33461 \begin_inset space ~
33465 \begin_inset space ~
33469 \begin_inset space ~
33474 the text “on page” and the page number:
33476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33478 reference "fig:Two-images"
33484 \begin_inset Newline newline
33487 If the label is on the same page,
33488 this format behaves like
33495 otherwise it behaves like
33499 \begin_inset space ~
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \begin_layout Description
33514 \begin_inset space ~
33518 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33519 \begin_inset Newline newline
33523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33532 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33542 \begin_inset Index idx
33547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33565 \begin_inset Index idx
33570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33573 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33593 \begin_inset Newline newline
33596 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33597 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33599 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33612 is the default and preferred because
33616 supports only English documents.
33617 The format is specified by using the command
33621 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33630 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33631 preamble of the document.
33632 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33649 \begin_inset Newline newline
33656 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33661 \begin_inset Newline newline
33672 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33673 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33674 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33677 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33683 you might do so as follows:
33684 \begin_inset Newline newline
33691 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33692 format{prop}{Proposition
33697 \begin_inset Newline newline
33700 For more information about defining formatted references,
33701 have a look at the package documentation
33702 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33704 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33710 \begin_inset Newline newline
33721 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33728 \begin_layout Description
33730 \begin_inset space ~
33734 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33737 LatexCommand nameref
33738 reference "fig:Two-images"
33746 \begin_layout Description
33748 \begin_inset space ~
33752 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33753 label for the reference:
33755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33756 LatexCommand labelonly
33757 reference "fig:Two-images"
33763 \begin_inset Newline newline
33766 This allows for customization,
33767 using \SpecialChar TeX
33769 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33776 then you may want to use the
33779 \begin_inset space ~
33785 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33794 This is the form needed for e.
33795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33799 \begin_inset space \space{}
33806 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33808 The varieties are adjusted in the field
33812 of the cross-reference window,
33813 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
33816 \begin_layout Standard
33817 You can only use the style
33821 to reference numbered document parts,
33822 while the reference style
33826 is always possible.
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33830 If you want to reference a section,
33831 put the label in the section heading;
33832 for floats put the label in the caption;
33833 for footnotes put the label in it.
33834 Referencing formulas is explained in section
33835 \begin_inset space ~
33839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33841 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
33849 \begin_layout Standard
33850 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33858 \begin_inset space ~
33863 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
33864 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33865 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label.)
33867 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
33870 \begin_inset space ~
33875 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
33876 You can also go back with the toolbar button
33879 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
33883 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
33888 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
33889 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
33897 \begin_layout Standard
33898 You can change labels at any time.
33899 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
33900 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
33902 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
33903 change them all manually
33908 \begin_layout Standard
33909 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
33910 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
33911 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33915 References are described in detail in the section
33926 \begin_layout Section
33927 Table of Contents and other Listings
33928 \begin_inset Index idx
33933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33940 \begin_inset Index idx
33945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33962 \begin_inset Index idx
33967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33974 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33983 \begin_layout Subsection
33985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33987 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
33994 \begin_layout Standard
33995 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
33997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33998 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34000 \begin_inset space ~
34004 \begin_inset space ~
34010 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34012 If you click on it,
34018 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34019 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34020 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34022 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34024 \begin_inset space ~
34029 that is described in section
34030 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34036 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34044 \begin_layout Standard
34045 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34046 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34047 as described in section
34048 \begin_inset space ~
34052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34054 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34060 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34062 \begin_inset space ~
34066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34068 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34073 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34074 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34077 \begin_layout Subsection
34080 Listings and Algorithms
34081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34083 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34090 \begin_layout Standard
34093 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34094 You can insert them via the
34096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34097 List/Contents/References
34100 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34103 \begin_layout Section
34104 URLs and Hyperlinks
34105 \begin_inset Index idx
34110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34117 \begin_inset Index idx
34122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34131 \begin_layout Subsection
34133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34142 \begin_layout Standard
34143 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34151 \begin_layout Standard
34152 Here is an example URL:
34156 \begin_inset Flex URL
34159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 https://www.lyx.org
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34171 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34172 You cannot change the style of the link text
34173 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34177 the URL text will always be in the style
34183 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34184 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34193 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34195 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34203 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34227 (use whatever the current text font is).
34228 To have italicized URLs,
34232 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34234 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34246 \begin_layout Standard
34248 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34249 To be able to format the URL text,
34250 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34252 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34258 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34260 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34262 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34264 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34265 between lines at certain characters,
34269 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34271 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34282 \begin_layout Standard
34284 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34285 It does not break at a hyphen (
34290 but you can change that by adding
34295 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34297 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34301 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34302 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34303 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34307 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34310 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34312 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34316 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34318 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34319 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34320 a last resort is to put
34323 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34327 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34331 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34334 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34335 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34340 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34341 in the preamble then the
34342 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34344 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34346 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34348 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34350 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34352 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34354 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34355 be broken at every character.
34357 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34374 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34383 \begin_layout Subsection
34385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34387 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34400 or with the toolbar button
34407 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34417 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34418 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34420 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34422 name "LyX's homepage"
34423 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34429 an Email address like this:
34431 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34433 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34434 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34442 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34446 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34447 or any other valid URI (such as
34458 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34466 \begin_layout Standard
34467 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
34468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34480 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
34482 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
34489 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
34490 To set the format of the link text,
34491 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
34492 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
34497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34499 name "LyX's homepage"
34500 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34508 \begin_layout Standard
34509 The link text color can be changed,
34514 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
34516 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34517 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34521 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
34522 \begin_inset Newline newline
34530 \begin_inset Newline newline
34537 in the PDF Properties dialog.
34538 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
34542 \begin_layout Section
34544 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
34546 \begin_inset Index idx
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34560 name "sec:Counters"
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34569 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34570 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34571 is its ability to manage counters.
34573 this is handled automatically,
34574 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34575 This can be done in
34576 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34578 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34581 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34582 using the counter inset,
34583 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34584 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34585 to reset it (to zero);
34589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34592 Note that the section counter,
34594 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34596 if you want the next section to be section five,
34598 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34605 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34606 since the value added can be negative);
34608 to restore the saved value;
34609 and to print the value.
34610 These effects can also be limited to
34611 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34613 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34616 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34618 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34620 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34622 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34625 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34629 \begin_layout Standard
34631 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34632 There are five commands you can use:
34635 \begin_layout Enumerate
34637 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34643 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34646 \begin_layout Enumerate
34648 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34654 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34655 if you choose a negative number)
34658 \begin_layout Enumerate
34660 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34666 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34669 \begin_layout Enumerate
34671 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34674 Save value of counter:
34677 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34680 \begin_layout Enumerate
34682 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34685 Restore value of counter:
34688 Restores the previously saved value.
34691 \begin_layout Standard
34693 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34694 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34699 \begin_layout Section
34701 \begin_inset Index idx
34706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34713 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34715 name "sec:Appendices"
34722 \begin_layout Standard
34723 Appendices are created with the menu
34725 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34731 \begin_inset space ~
34737 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34738 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34741 \begin_layout Standard
34742 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34743 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34744 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34745 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34749 \begin_layout Standard
34751 \begin_inset space ~
34755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34757 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
34767 \begin_inset space ~
34771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34773 reference "subsec:Export"
34781 \begin_layout Section
34783 \begin_inset Index idx
34788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34797 name "sec:Bibliography"
34804 \begin_layout Standard
34805 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
34807 You can include a bibliography database,
34808 which is explained in sec.
34809 \begin_inset space ~
34813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34815 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34824 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
34825 using the paragraph environment
34830 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
34831 \begin_inset space ~
34835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34837 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
34843 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
34844 such as author-year citations,
34845 and if you have more than a handful of references,
34846 then you should seriously consider
34850 using a bibliography database.
34853 \begin_layout Standard
34854 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
34855 we use two bibliographies in this document,
34860 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
34862 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
34864 the database approach relieves you,
34865 amongst other things,
34866 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
34869 \begin_layout Subsection
34870 The Bibliography Environment
34871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34873 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
34880 \begin_layout Standard
34886 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
34887 If you click on it,
34888 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
34897 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
34898 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
34899 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
34903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34908 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
34914 \begin_inset Newline newline
34918 \begin_inset Flex URL
34921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34923 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
34934 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34944 a short form of its title,
34946 \begin_inset Newline newline
34954 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
34959 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34967 \begin_layout Standard
34968 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
34970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34973 or the toolbar button
34976 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
34980 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
34981 Select one or more keys from the list and
34991 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
34992 If you click on the box,
34993 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
34996 \begin_layout Standard
34997 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
34998 Here are two examples;
34999 the first without a label,
35000 the second with the label
35001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35011 \begin_layout Standard
35015 Companion Second Edition
35019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35021 key "latexcompanion"
35029 \begin_layout Standard
35030 The \SpecialChar LyX
35031 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35043 \begin_layout Standard
35044 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35045 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35051 \begin_inset Index idx
35056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35059 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35076 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35077 the label needs to be given the form
35078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35089 Author A and Author B(Year)
35090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35097 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35104 \begin_inset space ~
35109 in the document settings
35110 \begin_inset Index idx
35115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35117 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35133 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35135 \begin_inset space ~
35141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35143 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35152 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35154 Once you have done that,
35158 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35160 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35163 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35182 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35183 the second the year (without parentheses).
35184 These two are madatory.
35185 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35191 ) and in abrreviated form (
35199 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35200 add the abbreviated form to
35204 and the full list to the optional
35212 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35213 If specified like this,
35216 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35217 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35237 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35241 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35242 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35243 In the bibliography entry,
35244 author and year must be added manually.
35249 \begin_layout Standard
35250 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35252 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35254 \begin_inset space ~
35262 arg "layout-paragraph"
35266 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35269 \begin_layout Subsection
35270 Bibliography databases
35271 \begin_inset Index idx
35276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35278 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35295 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35302 \begin_layout Standard
35303 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35308 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35309 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35314 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35315 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35316 This database can be used for different documents,
35317 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35318 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35321 \begin_layout Standard
35322 The database is a text file with the file extension
35323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35335 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35336 The format is explained in
35337 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35344 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35346 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35348 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35354 The file can be created using any text editor,
35355 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35356 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35358 \begin_inset Flex URL
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35363 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35373 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35374 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35375 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35376 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35377 But it has its drawbacks,
35378 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35379 Those are addressed by
35384 \begin_inset Index idx
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35392 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35407 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35408 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35419 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35421 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35422 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35432 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35435 \begin_layout Standard
35436 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35442 set in the document settings (menu
35444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35448 \begin_inset Index idx
35453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35455 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35476 \begin_inset space ~
35481 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35490 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35492 \begin_inset Index idx
35497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35499 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35503 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35517 \begin_layout Standard
35518 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35523 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35525 \begin_inset space ~
35531 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35539 Add bibliography to TOC
35541 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
35546 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
35548 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
35553 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
35554 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
35559 \begin_layout Standard
35560 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35561 style file is a text file with the file extension
35562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35573 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35574 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35575 distribution should provide several of these,
35576 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35577 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35578 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35579 but this is something for experts.
35583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35584 For information on how this is done,
35586 \begin_inset Newline newline
35590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35592 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35602 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35608 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35611 \begin_layout Standard
35612 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35617 \begin_inset Index idx
35622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35624 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35639 \begin_inset Index idx
35644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35647 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35664 \begin_layout Standard
35665 Accessing a database via
35669 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35672 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35674 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35679 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35680 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35682 \begin_inset space ~
35688 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35689 you cannot select a
35694 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35698 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35701 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35703 note the following.
35708 \begin_layout Standard
35713 has two different style files:
35714 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35726 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35738 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35739 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35740 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35743 \begin_layout Standard
35748 styles are not set in the
35751 \begin_inset space ~
35757 but in the document settings.
35758 \begin_inset Index idx
35763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35780 in the dialog in the
35785 which is only visible if you use
35790 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
35791 These options are described in detail in the
35797 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35807 \begin_layout Standard
35808 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
35809 \begin_inset space ~
35813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35815 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35827 Bibliography Processors
35830 \begin_layout Standard
35831 To generate the bibliography from a database,
35833 uses a bibliography processor,
35834 that is an external program that reads the database,
35835 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
35836 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35838 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
35839 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
35843 \begin_layout Standard
35845 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
35846 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
35847 You can do this on a general level in
35849 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35850 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35851 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 or for individual documents in
35856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35857 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35861 The following variants are available by default:
35864 \begin_layout Description
35867 \begin_inset Index idx
35872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35875 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35889 developed exclusively for
35893 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35899 provides full Unicode support,
35900 unlimited memory and many specific features
35910 it is strongly recommended to use
35917 \begin_layout Description
35918 bibtex the standard;
35919 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
35921 works with all bibliography packages,
35922 although it will probably fail with
35926 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
35929 \begin_layout Description
35930 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
35936 works with all bibliography packages,
35937 although more complex
35941 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
35946 features are supported.
35949 \begin_layout Standard
35950 By default (with the
35956 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35957 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35970 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35971 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35972 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35977 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
35990 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35991 -based bibliography styles).
35992 This should suit most needs.
35995 \begin_layout Standard
35996 In Japanese documents,
35997 a specific processor is used.
35998 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
35999 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36005 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36006 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36007 You can adjust it in
36009 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36010 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36011 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36017 \begin_layout Standard
36018 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36019 Before adding options,
36020 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36027 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36041 \begin_layout Standard
36043 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36044 These are explained in detail in section
36046 Customizing Bibliographies
36050 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36055 Additional Features
36058 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36062 \begin_layout Subsection
36064 \begin_inset Index idx
36069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36071 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36088 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36095 \begin_layout Standard
36096 Many different citation formats are common,
36098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36102 \begin_inset space \space{}
36105 numerical citation (as
36106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36113 like in this document),
36114 alpha-numerical citations (as
36115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36122 ) or author-year citations (as
36123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36132 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36135 \begin_layout Standard
36136 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36139 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36140 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36144 \begin_inset Index idx
36149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36151 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36165 you have a range of other options,
36166 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36171 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36175 \begin_inset space ~
36186 \begin_inset space ~
36191 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36194 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36203 With a bibliography database (see
36204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36206 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36214 ) one has in contrary to the
36218 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36219 These style formats are available:
36222 \begin_layout Description
36224 \begin_inset space ~
36227 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36228 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36231 \begin_layout Description
36232 Biblatex loads the package
36237 \begin_inset Index idx
36242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36245 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36259 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36261 Biblatex citation style
36265 Biblatex bibliography style
36268 Options to the package
36272 can be entered in the
36279 \begin_layout Description
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36285 \begin_inset space ~
36288 mode) loads the package
36292 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36293 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36304 behavior very closely.
36309 this option has some additional styles.
36314 styles are also supported by this variant.
36317 \begin_layout Description
36319 \begin_inset space ~
36322 (BibTeX) loads the package
36327 \begin_inset Index idx
36332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36335 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36349 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36352 \begin_layout Description
36354 \begin_inset space ~
36357 (BibTeX) loads the package
36362 \begin_inset Index idx
36367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36370 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36384 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36387 \begin_layout Standard
36396 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36397 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36407 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36409 Whether the output uses numerical,
36410 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36412 Biblatex citation style
36416 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36417 a suitable style is proposed.
36424 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36427 \begin_layout Standard
36428 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36429 multiple style variants are available in the
36434 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36450 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
36451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36455 \begin_inset space \space{}
36459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36470 \begin_layout Standard
36471 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
36473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36477 \begin_inset space \space{}
36481 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
36482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36486 \begin_inset space \space{}
36490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36502 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36520 Here is a simple example where the text
36521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36525 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36532 appears after the reference:
36535 \begin_layout Quote
36537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36540 key "latexcompanion"
36548 \begin_layout Standard
36549 All styles except for
36553 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
36554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36562 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
36563 if the style requires this.
36566 \begin_layout Standard
36567 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36568 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36569 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36570 the postnote will follow the last.
36575 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36579 qualified citation lists
36580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36586 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36590 dialog will display three columns in the field
36598 \begin_inset space ~
36607 \begin_inset space ~
36615 \begin_inset space ~
36621 If you double-click on an item's
36624 \begin_inset space ~
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36638 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36641 General text before
36647 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36650 \begin_layout Subsection
36652 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36653 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36655 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36659 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36665 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36667 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset space ~
36678 \begin_inset space ~
36682 \begin_inset space ~
36685 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36688 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36691 \begin_layout Itemize
36693 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36694 If citation entries include any of the fields
36695 \begin_inset Flex Code
36698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36700 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36709 \begin_inset Flex Code
36712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36714 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36722 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36724 \begin_inset Flex Code
36727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36737 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36742 \begin_inset Flex Code
36745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36747 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36756 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36759 \begin_layout Itemize
36761 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36762 If citation entries include any of the fields
36763 \begin_inset Flex Code
36766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36768 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36776 (filled by JabRef) or
36777 \begin_inset Flex Code
36780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36782 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36790 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
36791 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
36792 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
36795 \begin_layout Standard
36797 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36798 In addition to that,
36801 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
36806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36808 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36809 By default we provide python script
36810 \begin_inset Flex Code
36813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36815 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
36824 but you can use any modified script by setting
36825 \begin_inset Flex Code
36828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36830 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
36833 citation_search_view
36841 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
36843 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
36845 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36847 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
36852 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
36854 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36858 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36861 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
36862 The default setting is to be found in the file
36866 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
36874 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36875 your disk for matching files if you enable
36877 Search drive for cited files
36881 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36882 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
36883 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36884 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36888 It uses the tokens supplied at
36892 in the same preferences section (by default:
36894 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
36899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36901 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36903 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
36905 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
36907 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36909 \begin_inset Flex Code
36912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36914 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
36915 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
36924 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
36926 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
36928 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36947 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
36950 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36951 are automatically stripped from the result.
36952 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
36954 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
36963 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36965 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
36966 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
36968 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
36970 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36971 of the file (at arbitrary position).
36973 opens the first matching file it finds.
36974 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
36975 the more systematic your file naming is,
36976 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
36977 the greater the chance this works for you.
36982 \begin_layout Standard
36984 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
36985 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
36986 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36988 \begin_inset Flex Code
36991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36993 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37002 \begin_inset Flex Code
37005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37007 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37016 but there are also special keys,
37017 which are documented in the
37019 Customization manual
37025 Cite format description
37032 \begin_layout Section
37034 \begin_inset Index idx
37039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37046 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37055 \begin_layout Standard
37056 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37065 or the toolbar button
37072 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37074 \begin_inset space ~
37078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37080 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37085 for some advanced methods)
37089 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37093 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37095 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37099 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37104 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37106 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37108 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37111 the text that appears in the index
37112 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37113 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37123 index inset in the heading above for example)
37126 The word where the cursor is in
37127 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37131 or the currently highlighted text
37132 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37136 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37138 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37142 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37148 copied into the inset)
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37155 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37156 (which prints out the index in your document)
37159 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37160 in the document with
37161 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37167 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37169 \begin_inset space ~
37175 A light blue box labeled
37176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37187 will show the place where the index
37188 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37190 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37194 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37199 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37202 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37204 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37207 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37209 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37211 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37213 as there are no settings to make.
37214 This changes if you select
37215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37218 Use multiple indexes
37219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37223 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37229 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37239 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37240 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37246 \begin_layout Standard
37248 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37250 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37252 you can customize index entries to look different.
37253 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37254 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37255 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37256 or additionally to,
37258 you can format the page reference (e.
37259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37263 make it bold for specific pages),
37264 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37265 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37279 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37284 \begin_layout Standard
37286 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37287 give a short overview of
37288 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37292 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37293 these features in turn
37294 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37297 in the next subsections.
37298 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37299 's index mechanism,
37300 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37304 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37312 \begin_layout Subsection
37314 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37315 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37317 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37323 Grouping Index Entries
37324 \begin_inset Index idx
37329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37348 \begin_layout Standard
37349 Index entries are often
37350 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37353 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37354 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37355 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37361 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37368 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37378 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37379 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37383 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37393 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37394 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37400 three levels of grouping in total,
37401 are allowed per index entry.
37402 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
37403 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
37404 In the \SpecialChar LyX
37406 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
37411 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37420 \begin_layout Standard
37422 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
37424 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
37425 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
37426 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37427 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
37428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37436 First we create the entry
37437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37445 \begin_inset space ~
37449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37451 reference "subsec:Lists"
37457 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
37458 \begin_inset space ~
37462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37464 reference "sec:Itemize"
37470 we insert the command
37473 \begin_layout Standard
37475 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37481 \begin_layout Standard
37483 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37487 \begin_layout Standard
37489 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37497 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37498 for the enumerated list in section
37499 \begin_inset space ~
37503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37505 reference "sec:Enumerate"
37515 \begin_layout Standard
37517 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
37518 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37520 subentries are indicated by a preceding
37521 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
37525 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
37529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37537 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
37539 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37541 although you have to take care that the character is not
37544 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
37547 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37555 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37561 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
37562 marks the grouping levels.
37566 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
37567 You can have three levels;
37568 every index level is indented a bit more.
37569 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
37570 If we don't have an index entry for
37571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37579 it will be printed anyway,
37580 but without a page number.
37585 \begin_layout Subsection
37587 \begin_inset Index idx
37592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37611 \begin_layout Standard
37613 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
37615 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
37619 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
37620 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
37621 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
37622 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
37626 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
37628 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
37632 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
37633 index more pages under the same entry
37634 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
37635 refer to a page range instead,
37636 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
37637 one that marks the beginning of the range,
37638 the other that marks its end
37642 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
37643 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
37644 To mark start and end,
37645 select the respective
37649 option in the index inset settings dialog.
37650 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
37651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37669 \begin_layout Standard
37671 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
37672 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
37673 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
37674 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37679 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37681 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
37682 we create an index entry in section
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
37697 \begin_layout Standard
37699 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37702 Paragraph environments|(
37705 \begin_layout Standard
37707 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37708 and another entry at the end of section
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37715 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37723 \begin_layout Standard
37725 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37728 Paragraph environments|)
37731 \begin_layout Standard
37733 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37758 respectively start and end the index range.
37759 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
37760 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
37761 An example is the index entry
37762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37775 \begin_layout Subsection
37777 \begin_inset Index idx
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37784 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37801 \begin_layout Standard
37802 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
37803 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
37810 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
37811 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
37813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37825 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
37826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37838 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
37839 \begin_inset space ~
37843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37845 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37869 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
37870 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
37873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37874 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37880 \begin_layout Standard
37882 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
37883 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
37886 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37887 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37899 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
37900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37922 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37923 We referred for example in the index entry
37924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37938 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
37943 ) to the index entry
37944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37951 in the same section using the entry
37954 \begin_layout Standard
37956 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37959 GIF|see{Image formats}
37962 \begin_layout Standard
37964 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
37965 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37967 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
37968 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
37973 \begin_layout Subsection
37975 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
37976 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37978 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
37985 \begin_inset Index idx
37990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37992 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38009 \begin_layout Standard
38011 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38012 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38013 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38018 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38021 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38022 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38023 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38024 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38025 or if you use macros
38028 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38032 \begin_layout Standard
38034 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38035 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38041 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38043 \begin_inset space ~
38047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38049 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38059 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38060 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38087 \begin_inset Index idx
38092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38094 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38109 \begin_inset Index idx
38114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38116 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38131 \begin_inset Index idx
38136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38143 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38145 maison but we want the order maïs,
38152 \begin_layout Standard
38154 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38157 previous entry@current entry
38160 \begin_layout Standard
38162 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38163 In our case we want to have
38164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38179 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38184 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38192 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38193 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38194 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38196 See the next subsection for an example.
38197 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38201 \begin_layout Standard
38203 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38204 To accommodate for that,
38207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38208 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38212 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38213 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38215 you can pass the sort key
38216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38227 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38232 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38233 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38235 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38236 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38244 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38246 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38248 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38250 \begin_inset space ~
38254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38256 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38266 \begin_layout Subsection
38268 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38270 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38274 \begin_inset Index idx
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38281 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 \begin_layout Standard
38300 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38302 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38305 he appearance of index entries
38306 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38307 can be formatted as usual
38309 via the text style dialog
38310 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38312 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38313 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38316 \begin_inset Index idx
38321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38329 This is an italic dummy entry
38340 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38341 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38356 will be listed separately.
38358 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38360 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38364 \begin_layout Standard
38366 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38370 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38372 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38376 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38382 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38384 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38385 number using the character
38386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38393 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38394 -command without a backslash.
38395 We can write for example
38396 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38397 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
38417 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
38424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38428 a self-defined command
38429 \begin_inset Flex Code
38432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38434 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
38442 or an existing macro such as
38443 \begin_inset Flex Code
38446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38448 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
38461 \begin_layout Standard
38463 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38466 italic page number:|textit
38469 \begin_layout Standard
38471 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38472 to get the page number in italic.
38473 \begin_inset Index idx
38478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 italic page number:|textit
38485 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
38486 -commands begin with a backslash,
38487 but in this special case
38488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38504 \begin_inset space ~
38510 Have a look at section
38511 \begin_inset space ~
38515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38517 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38522 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38528 \begin_layout Standard
38530 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
38531 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38540 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
38544 to generate the index,
38546 \begin_inset space ~
38550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38552 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38563 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
38568 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
38570 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38573 key "latexcompanion"
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38590 we encourage you to
38591 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
38592 not format page numbers directly as shown above
38593 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
38594 use self-defined commands
38598 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
38599 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
38600 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
38602 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
38604 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
38605 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
38606 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
38609 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
38613 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
38614 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
38615 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
38616 definition of the indexed term,
38617 so that users can easily find definitions.
38619 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
38623 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
38626 the following in the preamble
38629 \begin_layout Standard
38635 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
38637 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
38643 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
38651 \begin_layout Standard
38653 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
38655 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38656 add the custom formatting
38657 \begin_inset Flex Code
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38670 to the respective entry settings dialog.
38675 \begin_layout Standard
38677 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38683 \begin_layout Standard
38685 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38686 in the index entry.
38687 \begin_inset Index idx
38692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38699 The advantage is that,
38701 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
38702 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
38705 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
38706 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
38707 not every single index entry.
38708 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38712 \begin_layout Standard
38714 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38715 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38726 If you use the index processor
38732 makeindex or xindex
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38741 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38747 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
38752 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
38753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38760 (style file) you use before they can be used.
38762 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
38765 \begin_layout Verbatim
38767 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
38769 (markup-locref :open "
38771 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
38774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
38778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38781 key "latexcompanion"
38796 \begin_layout Standard
38797 You can also change the layout
38798 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
38800 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
38806 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
38808 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
38812 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
38816 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
38820 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
38823 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
38826 get a bold font for all index entries.
38828 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
38831 it is better (and required for
38832 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
38835 more advanced tasks
38836 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
38840 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
38843 to set up a so-called
38846 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
38870 ) to determine the formatting;
38871 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
38876 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
38878 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
38884 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
38891 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
38899 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
38907 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
38912 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
38914 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38916 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
38922 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
38924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38926 key "makeindex,xindy"
38935 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
38936 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
38937 packages available that ease such formatting,
38939 \begin_inset Flex URL
38942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
38946 https://ctan.org/topic/index
38956 \begin_layout Subsection
38958 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
38959 Special Characters in Index Entries
38960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38962 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38969 \begin_layout Standard
38971 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
38972 As already mentioned above,
38973 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
38976 \begin_inset Flex Code
38979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
38991 \begin_inset Flex Code
38994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38996 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39006 \begin_inset Flex Code
39009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39011 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39012 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39024 \begin_inset Flex Code
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39029 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39038 If you use them literally,
39039 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39041 you will not get the character itself.
39044 \begin_layout Standard
39046 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39047 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39049 \begin_inset Quotes els
39053 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39057 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39059 the escape character is
39060 \begin_inset Flex Code
39063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39065 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39066 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39076 (but this can be changed).
39078 \begin_inset Flex Code
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39083 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39084 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39096 \begin_inset Flex Code
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39101 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39102 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39114 \begin_inset Flex Code
39117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39119 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39120 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39124 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39136 \begin_inset Flex Code
39139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39141 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39142 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39152 to get the special character you want.
39153 Note that the escape character,
39155 \begin_inset Flex Code
39158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39160 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39161 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39176 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39177 \begin_inset space ~
39181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39183 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39193 \begin_layout Subsection
39195 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39198 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39202 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39205 \begin_layout Standard
39207 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39208 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39209 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39210 This is not only time-consuming,
39211 but also error-prone;
39213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39217 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39219 provides some functions to ease the task.
39222 \begin_layout Standard
39224 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39226 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39227 you can open the outliner via
39229 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39239 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39249 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39250 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39255 it will be more easier),
39260 -click on the entry and select
39262 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39264 from the context menu.
39265 This will do just what it says:
39266 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39269 \begin_layout Standard
39271 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39274 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39275 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39276 you can select from the context menu
39278 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39281 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39282 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39283 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39284 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39288 is the word before the index entry,
39293 will be considered as well,
39299 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39301 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39302 but only relevant occurrences!
39303 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39304 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39306 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39309 \begin_layout Subsection
39311 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39313 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39317 \begin_inset Index idx
39322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39341 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39348 \begin_layout Standard
39350 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39352 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39359 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39368 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39376 for index generation;
39377 otherwise the program
39382 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39385 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39392 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39398 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39399 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39400 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39401 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
39403 if you are writing in another than the English language,
39418 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
39419 As a further option,
39420 you can select the rather new
39427 \begin_layout Itemize
39429 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
39435 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39436 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39437 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
39439 \begin_inset space ~
39443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39445 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
39451 how to manually fix this sorting,
39452 but this is very tedious work).
39455 \begin_layout Itemize
39457 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
39458 The alternative program,
39464 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
39465 It can sort most languages correctly,
39466 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
39472 is no longer actively maintained,
39473 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
39479 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
39480 But if you have it available,
39481 it is almost always a better option than
39488 \begin_layout Itemize
39490 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
39497 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
39498 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
39499 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
39500 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
39502 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
39503 The program is still in development,
39504 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
39505 But the program is definitely worth a try,
39510 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39517 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
39519 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
39523 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
39525 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
39528 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
39529 's preferences dialog,
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39537 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39543 The available options are listed and explained in
39544 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
39546 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39548 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
39554 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
39556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39558 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
39568 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
39570 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
39574 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
39576 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39579 alternative program
39580 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39583 to generate the index.
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
39588 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
39591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39596 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
39599 \begin_layout Subsection
39601 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
39602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39604 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
39613 \begin_layout Standard
39614 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
39616 you might need to set up a separate
39617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39624 next to the standard index.
39626 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
39627 but there are packages that add this feature.
39634 \begin_inset Index idx
39639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39642 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39656 package to generate multiple indexes.
39657 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
39662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39663 If yours does not ship it,
39664 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
39667 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39675 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39677 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
39678 Please consult the package's manual for details.
39686 \begin_layout Standard
39687 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
39688 for the use of multiple indexes,
39691 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39692 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39695 and select the option
39697 Use multiple Indexes
39704 already contains the standard index
39705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39713 To add further indexes,
39714 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39718 input field and press the
39723 The new index now also appears in the list.
39725 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39726 label color to the new index.
39729 \begin_layout Standard
39730 Once the document changes have been applied,
39731 you can find the new index list in
39733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39734 List/Contents/References
39740 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
39741 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
39742 but there are additional features:
39745 \begin_layout Itemize
39746 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
39747 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
39750 \begin_layout Itemize
39751 By right-clicking on an index,
39752 you can change its type.
39754 you can specify an index to be a
39760 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
39762 if you use a book class,
39763 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
39764 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
39767 \begin_layout Itemize
39772 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
39773 code in the name of the index.
39776 \begin_layout Section
39777 Nomenclature/Glossary
39778 \begin_inset Index idx
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39790 \begin_inset Index idx
39795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39797 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
39800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39812 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39814 name "sec:Nomenclature"
39821 \begin_layout Standard
39822 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
39825 \begin_layout Standard
39826 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
39827 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39833 \begin_inset Index idx
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39859 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39866 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39870 \begin_layout Standard
39871 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
39873 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39879 \begin_inset space ~
39884 or the toolbar button
39887 arg "nomencl-insert"
39892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39903 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
39906 \begin_layout Standard
39907 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
39908 The first is the term or
39912 that you wish to define.
39917 of the term or symbol.
39920 \begin_layout Standard
39921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39930 To use \SpecialChar TeX
39931 code for nomenclature entries the option
39935 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
39943 \begin_layout Subsection
39944 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
39945 \begin_inset Index idx
39950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39969 \begin_layout Standard
39970 If you have symbols in formulas,
39971 you have to define them in the
39975 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
39978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39982 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
39986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39991 \begin_inset Newline newline
39999 \begin_inset Newline newline
40005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40012 character starts/ends the formula.
40013 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40014 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40025 For capital Greek letters,
40026 start the command also with a capital letter,
40036 \begin_layout Standard
40037 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40038 syntax is given in section
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40045 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40053 \begin_layout Standard
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40062 dialog to format the description text;
40063 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40065 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40070 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40077 in this document is:
40078 \begin_inset Newline newline
40083 dummy entry for the character
40088 \begin_inset Newline newline
40100 \begin_inset space ~
40110 font use the command
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40147 \begin_inset space \space{}
40151 \begin_inset Newline newline
40167 \begin_inset Newline newline
40170 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40171 This command will make the font of all symbols
40178 \begin_inset space ~
40186 \begin_layout Standard
40187 If the characters |
40188 \begin_inset space \space{}
40192 \begin_inset space \space{}
40196 \begin_inset space \space{}
40201 \begin_inset space \space{}
40205 \begin_inset space \space{}
40208 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40209 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40210 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40212 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40215 character in front of them.
40216 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40218 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40219 LatexCommand nomenclature
40220 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40221 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40227 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40229 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40230 LatexCommand nomenclature
40231 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40232 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40242 \begin_layout Subsection
40243 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40244 \begin_inset Index idx
40249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40251 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40268 \begin_layout Standard
40269 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40270 -code of the symbol definition.
40271 This leads to undesired results when you,
40273 have symbols in formulas.
40274 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40277 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40278 LatexCommand nomenclature
40280 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40288 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40292 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40293 LatexCommand nomenclature
40296 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40302 They will be sorted by
40303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40329 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40332 will be sorted before the
40336 since the character
40337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40344 is considered in sorting.
40347 \begin_layout Standard
40348 To control the sort order,
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40357 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40358 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40359 For the example given,
40364 in this field for the
40365 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40373 will be located before
40374 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40380 \begin_layout Standard
40381 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40397 \begin_layout Subsection
40398 Nomenclature Options
40399 \begin_inset Index idx
40404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40423 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
40430 \begin_layout Standard
40435 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
40436 Here are some of its options;
40437 for more have a look at its documentation:
40440 \begin_layout Description
40441 refeq Appends the phrase
40442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40458 to every nomenclature entry,
40465 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
40468 \begin_layout Description
40469 refpage Appends the phrase
40470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40486 to every nomenclature entry,
40493 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
40496 \begin_layout Description
40497 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
40500 \begin_layout Standard
40501 To use one or more of the options,
40502 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
40504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40508 In this document the options
40516 \begin_layout Standard
40517 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40524 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
40528 field in the nomenclature dialog:
40531 \begin_layout Description
40541 \begin_layout Description
40544 nomrefpage Like the
40551 \begin_layout Description
40554 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
40563 \begin_layout Description
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40578 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
40581 \begin_layout Standard
40583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40590 are automatically translated for most document languages.
40592 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40605 \begin_inset Newline newline
40611 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40631 \begin_inset Newline newline
40638 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40639 \begin_inset Newline newline
40645 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40649 \begin_inset space ~
40667 \begin_layout Standard
40668 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
40669 assure that you use
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40677 in the document settings under
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40688 \begin_layout Standard
40696 \begin_inset Newline newline
40700 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40704 \begin_inset space ~
40717 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40719 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40720 \begin_inset Newline newline
40727 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40728 \begin_inset Newline newline
40732 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40749 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
40754 \begin_layout Subsection
40755 Printing the Nomenclature
40756 \begin_inset Index idx
40761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40763 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40780 \begin_layout Standard
40781 To print the nomenclature,
40784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40785 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
40790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40801 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
40802 By right-clicking on it,
40803 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
40804 You can choose between these settings:
40807 \begin_layout Description
40808 Default a space of 1
40809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40815 \begin_layout Description
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40824 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
40827 \begin_layout Description
40828 Custom custom space
40831 \begin_layout Standard
40832 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
40833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40841 If you are not happy with the name,
40842 you can change it by redefining the command
40850 in order to change the name to
40855 add the following line to the preamble:
40858 \begin_layout Standard
40871 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40875 When you are using another document language than English,
40877 \begin_inset Newline newline
40893 where *** is the name of the language used.
40896 \begin_layout Subsection
40897 Nomenclature Program
40898 \begin_inset Index idx
40903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40905 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40920 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40922 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
40929 \begin_layout Standard
40936 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
40938 to generate the nomenclature.
40940 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40952 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
40958 The available options are listed and explained in
40959 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40961 key "nomencl,makeindex"
40969 \begin_layout Section
40971 \begin_inset Index idx
40976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40983 \begin_inset Index idx
40988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40990 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41007 name "sec:Branches"
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41015 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41016 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41017 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41020 \begin_layout Standard
41021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41022 allows you to put text into branches.
41023 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41024 To create a branch,
41025 either select the menu
41027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41028 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41031 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41033 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41041 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41042 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41043 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41044 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41046 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41062 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41063 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41068 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41073 where you can choose a branch.
41074 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41078 Here is an example,
41079 where only the question text appears,
41080 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41083 \begin_layout Standard
41084 \begin_inset Branch Question
41088 \begin_layout Standard
41094 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41102 \begin_layout Standard
41103 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41107 \begin_layout Standard
41113 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41121 \begin_layout Standard
41128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41133 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41134 Consider for example a file
41135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41142 which has the above branches.
41144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41152 the PDF export file would be called
41153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41176 branch were inactive,
41178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41215 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41219 if both branches were active.
41220 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41221 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41227 \begin_layout Standard
41229 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41230 It is also possible to
41231 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41235 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41237 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41241 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41246 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41247 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41251 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41253 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41256 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41257 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41258 right-click on the inset button and choose
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_layout Standard
41270 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41274 \begin_layout Standard
41281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41288 branch is deactivated.
41294 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41300 \begin_layout Standard
41301 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41302 like inside equations,
41303 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41304 definitions for each branch.
41305 For example you can define for the question branch
41309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41310 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41319 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41332 \begin_layout Standard
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41352 \begin_layout Standard
41353 and for the answer branch
41356 \begin_layout Standard
41366 \begin_layout Standard
41376 \begin_layout Standard
41377 \begin_inset Branch Question
41381 \begin_layout Standard
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41413 \begin_layout Standard
41414 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41418 \begin_layout Standard
41422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41450 \begin_layout Standard
41451 Now it is possible to use the
41455 question{\SpecialChar ldots
41462 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
41465 commands to obtain conditional output.
41466 Here is an example formula where only the
41473 \begin_inset Formula
41475 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
41483 \begin_layout Standard
41485 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
41493 \begin_layout Standard
41494 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
41495 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41499 \begin_inset space \space{}
41502 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
41504 For this advanced usage,
41512 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41515 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41521 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41522 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close status of all branch insets in the document we provide
41528 which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined context menu of branch inset.
41533 \begin_layout Section
41535 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41537 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
41542 \begin_inset Index idx
41547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41556 \begin_layout Standard
41558 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
41563 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41564 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41568 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
41571 allows you to set up
41572 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
41574 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
41578 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
41580 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
41584 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
41588 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
41593 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
41595 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
41599 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
41601 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
41604 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41606 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
41608 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
41616 \begin_inset Index idx
41621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41624 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41639 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
41640 which you need to enable by clicking
41642 Use Hyperref Support
41644 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
41645 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
41647 Customize Hyperref Options
41650 Among other things,
41652 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
41656 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
41658 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
41662 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
41666 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
41669 cross-references in the
41670 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
41674 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
41676 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
41680 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
41681 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
41685 table of contents entry or on a reference to
41686 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
41687 open a website or to
41689 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
41691 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
41693 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
41694 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
41699 \begin_layout Standard
41700 The header information in the dialog tab
41704 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
41705 Many programs are able to extract this information,
41708 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
41711 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
41712 This is very useful to sort,
41713 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
41717 \begin_inset space ~
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41728 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
41731 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
41734 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
41738 \begin_inset space ~
41742 \begin_inset space ~
41746 \begin_inset space ~
41751 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
41752 which is useful for presentations.
41755 \begin_layout Standard
41757 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
41759 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
41767 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
41768 you can customize the
41769 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
41771 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
41775 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
41777 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
41781 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
41783 and you can specify
41786 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
41788 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
41789 will look and if links for
41791 bibliographical backreferences are created
41792 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
41798 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
41799 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset space ~
41818 option allows long links to be split;
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset space ~
41843 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
41847 \begin_inset space ~
41852 colors the different links.
41853 The default colors are:
41856 \begin_layout Labeling
41857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41862 for hyperlinks and URLs
41865 \begin_layout Labeling
41866 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41874 \begin_layout Labeling
41875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
41883 \begin_layout Standard
41884 but you can change these in the
41885 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
41887 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
41893 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
41895 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
41902 in this document they were changed with the
41903 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
41907 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
41917 \begin_layout Quote
41926 \begin_layout Standard
41928 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
41934 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
41936 depending on the option selected,
41937 the number of the section,
41938 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
41943 \begin_layout Standard
41948 you can specify if PDF
41949 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
41951 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
41955 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
41956 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
41958 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
41959 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
41961 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
41963 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
41967 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
41973 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
41975 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
41977 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
41980 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
41988 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
41989 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
41990 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
41991 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
41995 \begin_inset space ~
41998 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42000 \begin_inset space ~
42003 1 will only display the sections
42004 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42005 (collapsing the rest)
42008 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42012 \begin_layout Standard
42014 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42019 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42020 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42027 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42028 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42029 \begin_inset Flex Code
42032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42034 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42045 not via the package options.
42046 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42047 If you need to use one of those options,
42048 you can set them by adding
42051 \begin_layout Quote
42053 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42056 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42057 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42059 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42065 \begin_layout Standard
42067 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42070 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42071 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42074 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42081 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42086 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42088 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42089 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42090 input is simply ignored).
42091 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42097 At the point of writing this,
42098 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42100 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42103 but it is expected that in the future,
42104 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42107 \begin_layout Standard
42109 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42110 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42111 When you look in its document settings,
42112 you can see that some additional
42117 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42118 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42130 \begin_layout Section
42132 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42134 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42136 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42143 \begin_layout Subsection
42146 \begin_inset Index idx
42151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42161 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 As \SpecialChar LyX
42170 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42172 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42173 commands and constructs,
42176 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42177 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42178 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42179 -package for every problem,
42180 though \SpecialChar LyX
42181 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42184 \begin_layout Standard
42186 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42187 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42188 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42191 Code box is created by the menu
42193 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42200 or by the toolbar button
42213 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42220 \begin_layout Standard
42221 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42223 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42226 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42231 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42236 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42244 you can write the command part
42250 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42251 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42255 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42256 Code box behind the word.
42257 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42258 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42261 \begin_layout Standard
42262 \begin_inset Graphics
42263 filename clipart/ERT.png
42271 \begin_layout Standard
42275 \begin_layout Standard
42276 This is a line with a
42280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42303 \begin_layout Standard
42304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42313 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42314 -commands without parameters,
42315 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42316 know that the command is finished.
42324 \begin_layout Subsection
42325 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42327 \begin_inset Argument 1
42330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
42338 \begin_inset Index idx
42343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42353 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42361 When you write larger documents or books,
42362 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42363 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
42364 uses in the background.
42365 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
42366 is based on commands,
42368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42376 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
42378 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
42379 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
42380 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
42381 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42385 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
42387 As mentioned above,
42388 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42390 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42393 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 As result you find that the package
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42417 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
42435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42438 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42450 \begin_layout Standard
42455 usepackage[options]{package name}
42458 \begin_layout Standard
42459 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
42460 commands begin with a backslash,
42461 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
42462 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42466 In your case the package name is
42471 After a look in the documentation of the package,
42472 you know that the option
42476 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
42477 So you add the command
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42485 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
42488 \begin_layout Standard
42489 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
42493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42494 For more commands provided by the
42499 have a look at its documentation,
42501 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
42518 For example if you use a
42523 you don't need the package
42528 you can instead write
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42536 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
42541 \begin_layout Standard
42542 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
42543 So if you plan to write a large document,
42544 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
42551 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
42554 \begin_layout Standard
42555 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
42556 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
42557 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42559 use the \SpecialChar TeX
42560 Code box as described in the previous section.
42563 \begin_layout Standard
42564 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
42566 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42568 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42570 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
42578 \begin_layout Standard
42579 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42585 \begin_layout Standard
42589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42599 \begin_inset Note Note
42602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42603 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
42611 \begin_layout Left Header
42612 \begin_inset Argument 1
42615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_inset Note Note
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42639 defines the header line as described below
42647 \begin_layout Center Header
42648 \begin_inset Argument 1
42651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42660 \begin_layout Right Header
42661 \begin_inset Argument 1
42664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42685 \begin_layout Left Footer
42686 \begin_inset Argument 1
42689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 \begin_layout Center Footer
42711 \begin_inset Argument 1
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42726 \begin_inset Newline newline
42730 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42736 \begin_layout Right Footer
42737 \begin_inset Argument 1
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 \begin_layout Section
42763 Customized Page Headers and Footers
42764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42766 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
42771 \begin_inset Index idx
42776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42778 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42793 \begin_inset Index idx
42798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42807 \begin_layout Standard
42808 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
42809 you need to set the
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42829 \begin_inset space ~
42835 As a second step add in the menu
42837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42847 Custom Header/Footerlines
42850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42854 This module offers the following 6
42855 \begin_inset space ~
42861 \begin_layout Description
42863 \begin_inset space ~
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42871 \begin_inset space ~
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42879 \begin_inset space ~
42885 \begin_layout Description
42887 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42895 \begin_inset space ~
42899 \begin_inset space ~
42903 \begin_inset space ~
42909 \begin_layout Standard
42910 for the different positions in the header/footer.
42911 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
42914 \begin_layout Standard
42916 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
42917 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
42919 \begin_inset space ~
42923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42925 reference "fig:Page-layout"
42930 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42934 \begin_inset Float figure
42941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42944 \begin_inset Tabular
42945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
42946 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
42947 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42949 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
42951 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
42963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42969 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
42972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42980 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
42983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42998 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43009 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43013 The normal text on the page goes here.
43014 The running header is above the text,
43015 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43016 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43017 title of the chapter,
43018 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43024 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43033 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43044 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43062 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43073 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43091 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43109 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43114 name "fig:Page-layout"
43118 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43131 \begin_layout Standard
43132 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43144 \begin_inset space ~
43149 is set to “Default”.
43150 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43158 \begin_layout Subsection
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43163 To define your header line,
43164 add all three header environments.
43165 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43166 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43167 For single-sided documents,
43168 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43169 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43170 nothing appears in the output.
43171 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43175 For the definition,
43176 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43177 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43182 \begin_inset space ~
43190 \begin_layout Description
43193 thepage prints the current page number
43196 \begin_layout Description
43199 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43202 \begin_layout Description
43205 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43208 \begin_layout Description
43211 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43212 If the document has chapters,
43213 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43219 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43222 because it usually goes in a left header.
43225 \begin_layout Description
43228 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43229 If the document has chapters,
43230 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43231 It is normally used in the right header.
43234 \begin_layout Subsection
43235 Default header/footer
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43239 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43240 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43241 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43242 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43243 but leave it blank.
43245 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43257 \begin_layout Subsection
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43262 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43263 Some pages are different.
43264 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43265 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43266 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43267 but that is normal.
43268 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43272 Header and footer decoration line
43275 \begin_layout Standard
43278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43281 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43282 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43294 in the following way:
43297 \begin_layout Standard
43304 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43307 \begin_layout Standard
43308 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43321 If you don't want a line,
43322 set the thickness to 0
43323 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43329 \begin_layout Standard
43330 The lines can also be colored,
43331 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43333 If you really need this,
43334 have a look at the Internet or in section
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43350 Several header/footer lines
43353 \begin_layout Standard
43354 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
43355 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
43357 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
43358 To expand the height,
43359 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43374 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43375 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43377 \begin_inset space ~
43385 \begin_layout Standard
43392 headheight}{height}
43395 \begin_layout Standard
43400 is a size in standard units (e.
43401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43405 \begin_inset space \space{}
43413 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
43414 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
43415 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43416 logfile with the menu
43418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43428 \begin_inset space ~
43433 to see if you can find a warning about the package
43438 \begin_inset Index idx
43443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43461 If there is such a warning,
43462 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
43465 \begin_layout Subsection
43469 \begin_layout Standard
43470 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
43471 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
43472 This example consists of the following definition:
43475 \begin_layout Description
43477 \begin_inset space ~
43487 empty optional argument
43490 \begin_layout Description
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43496 empty optional argument
43499 \begin_layout Description
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43511 in the optional argument
43514 \begin_layout Description
43516 \begin_inset space ~
43526 in the optional argument
43529 \begin_layout Description
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43549 \begin_inset Newline newline
43553 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43560 in the optional argument
43563 \begin_layout Description
43565 \begin_inset space ~
43575 empty optional argument
43578 \begin_layout Description
43581 headrulewidth set to 2
43582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43588 \begin_layout Standard
43589 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
43591 For more specialized features,
43594 see the manual of the
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43610 \begin_layout Standard
43611 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43617 \begin_layout Standard
43621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43625 pagestyle{headings}
43631 \begin_inset Note Note
43634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43635 switches back to page style with the default headings
43643 \begin_layout Section
43644 Previewing Snippets of your Document
43645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43647 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43652 \begin_inset Index idx
43657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43664 \begin_inset Index idx
43669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43671 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 \begin_layout Standard
43690 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
43693 \begin_layout Subsection
43697 \begin_layout Standard
43698 To get previews working,
43699 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43705 \begin_inset Index idx
43710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43727 (on some systems named simply
43732 If it is not already installed,
43733 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
43736 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43743 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43745 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
43754 for \SpecialChar LyX
43755 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43756 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
43760 \begin_layout Subsection
43764 \begin_layout Standard
43765 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43766 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43768 activate the option
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43778 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43791 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43816 is the multiplication factor for the size.
43819 \begin_layout Standard
43820 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43841 \begin_layout Standard
43842 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
43843 and when you finish editing an inset.
43846 \begin_layout Standard
43847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43865 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
43873 \begin_layout Subsection
43874 Selected document parts
43877 \begin_layout Standard
43878 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
43879 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
43880 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43883 insert a preview inset via the menu
43885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43889 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
43890 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
43891 If you click on the preview,
43892 you can edit the previewed stuff.
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43897 To create rotated boxes,
43898 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43905 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
43910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43917 is explained in section
43919 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43934 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
43935 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
43936 the final rotated boxes,
43937 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
43938 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
43939 Here is the result:
43942 \begin_layout Standard
43943 \begin_inset Preview
43945 \begin_layout Standard
43950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43954 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
43960 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
43970 height_special "totalheight"
43975 backgroundcolor "none"
43978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44009 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44031 \begin_layout Standard
44032 Previewing works also for colors.
44033 In this example a special framed,
44034 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44052 is explained in section
44059 \begin_inset space ~
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 \begin_inset Preview
44075 \begin_layout Standard
44079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44098 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44103 This is text within a colored,
44108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44123 \begin_layout Standard
44124 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44130 \begin_layout Standard
44131 If \SpecialChar LyX
44132 does not show a preview,
44133 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44134 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44135 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44137 If \SpecialChar LyX
44138 cannot create a preview,
44139 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44141 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44142 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44143 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44146 \begin_layout Subsection
44151 \begin_layout Standard
44152 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44153 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44156 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44163 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44165 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44166 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44168 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44169 To view the whole document as source,
44170 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44176 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44178 but note that if you have several documents open,
44179 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44181 not just the one which is open at the time.
44184 \begin_layout Section
44185 Advanced Find and Replace
44186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44188 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44193 \begin_inset Index idx
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 \begin_inset Index idx
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44219 \begin_layout Subsection
44223 \begin_layout Standard
44224 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44225 allows for searching of complex,
44226 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44228 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44229 The key-features are:
44232 \begin_layout Itemize
44233 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44234 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44235 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44236 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44239 \begin_layout Itemize
44240 Search may be format-insensitive,
44241 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44244 and even mathematics),
44245 or it may be format-sensitive,
44248 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44251 \begin_layout Itemize
44252 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44253 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44256 \begin_layout Itemize
44257 Search may be widened to a specific
44263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44267 \begin_inset space ~
44270 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44271 all the open files,
44272 or all the manuals available from the
44279 \begin_layout Itemize
44280 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44281 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44286 \begin_inset space ~
44291 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44294 \begin_layout Subsection
44298 \begin_layout Standard
44299 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44301 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44314 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44317 ) or the toolbar button
44320 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44326 Advanced Find and Replace
44331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44341 mini-editor a simple word,
44342 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44350 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
44353 arg "paragraph-break"
44357 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
44359 bold or normal face,
44360 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
44364 arg "paragraph-break"
44367 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
44371 searches backwards.
44374 \begin_layout Standard
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44383 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
44391 \begin_inset space ~
44396 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
44399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44400 Searching for mathematics
44403 \begin_layout Standard
44404 Mathematical formulas,
44406 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
44409 or something more complex like
44410 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
44414 may be searched for by typing them in the
44419 When searching for a formula,
44420 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
44421 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
44422 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
44428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44432 \begin_layout Standard
44433 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
44434 This is done by switching to the
44438 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
44451 \begin_layout Itemize
44452 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
44455 \begin_layout Itemize
44456 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
44457 and within the same text style only.
44460 \begin_layout Itemize
44461 a normal word in a section heading,
44462 and searching for it,
44463 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
44465 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
44466 in addition to a section style,
44467 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
44470 \begin_layout Itemize
44471 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
44474 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 The entries made in the
44483 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44492 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
44497 button or alternatively press
44500 arg "paragraph-break"
44507 while the cursor is in the
44510 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_layout Standard
44519 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
44521 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
44524 \begin_layout Itemize
44525 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
44526 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
44527 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44534 with its typewriter version
44535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44549 \begin_layout Itemize
44550 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
44551 for example replacing occurrences of
44552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44556 \begin_inset Formula $R$
44560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44568 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
44572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44575 (you may want to enable the
44578 \begin_inset space ~
44586 \begin_inset space ~
44591 options and disable the
44600 in order to avoid replacing all
44601 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44605 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44608 letters occurring in normal text),
44610 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
44614 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
44619 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
44623 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
44629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44633 \begin_layout Standard
44634 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44639 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
44641 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44643 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
44653 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
44658 This is done with the context menu
44660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44661 Insert Regular Expression
44663 while the cursor is in the
44668 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
44672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44673 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
44676 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44680 \begin_inset space ~
44683 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
44685 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
44691 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
44692 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
44693 Examples of using such a feature may be:
44696 \begin_layout Enumerate
44697 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
44703 editor the fraction
44704 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
44708 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44711 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
44714 \begin_layout Enumerate
44715 Searching for all text with a given style:
44718 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
44722 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
44725 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
44726 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
44732 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44733 and the 'Select all'
44743 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44748 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
44749 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
44752 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44755 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
44756 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
44758 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
44759 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
44763 \begin_layout Description
44765 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
44766 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
44769 \begin_layout Description
44771 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
44773 \begin_inset space ~
44776 color colored text like cyan,
44781 \begin_layout Description
44783 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
44785 \begin_inset space ~
44793 \begin_layout Description
44795 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
44797 \begin_inset space ~
44804 \begin_layout Description
44806 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
44808 \begin_inset space ~
44817 \begin_layout Description
44819 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
44821 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_layout Description
44832 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
44833 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
44838 \begin_layout Description
44840 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
44847 \begin_layout Description
44849 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
44850 Strike-through Single,
44854 \begin_layout Description
44856 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
44857 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
44860 \begin_layout Description
44862 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44877 \begin_layout Standard
44879 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
44880 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
44881 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44885 and referring back to them through
44886 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44891 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
44897 try searching with the regexp
44898 \begin_inset Newline newline
44902 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
44914 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
44915 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
44920 \begin_inset Newline newline
44923 in order to find word repetitions,
44927 \begin_layout Standard
44928 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
44929 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
44935 \begin_layout Standard
44936 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44945 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
44946 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
44947 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44953 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
44956 always refers to the first occurrence of
44957 \begin_inset Formula $()$
44960 in all entered regexps.
44968 \begin_layout Section
44970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44972 name "sec:Spellchecking"
44977 \begin_inset Index idx
44982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44991 \begin_layout Standard
44993 has a built-in spell checker.
44996 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45004 key or the toolbar button
45007 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45010 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45011 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45012 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45013 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45014 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45015 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45016 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45017 if any could be found.
45018 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45023 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45024 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45027 \begin_layout Standard
45029 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45035 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45037 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45038 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45049 arg "dialog-show character"
45052 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45054 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45057 \begin_layout Standard
45058 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45059 can be downloaded from here:
45060 \begin_inset Newline newline
45064 \begin_inset Flex URL
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45069 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45071 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45072 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45073 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45081 \begin_inset Newline newline
45085 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45087 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45088 You should download
45091 \begin_inset space ~
45094 files for each language
45095 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45100 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45103 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45105 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45109 \begin_inset space ~
45112 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45113 's installation subfolder
45121 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45123 \begin_inset Newline newline
45126 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45127 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45128 but in most cases these are
45148 is the language code.
45151 \begin_layout Subsection
45155 \begin_layout Standard
45158 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45159 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45164 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45167 you can set the following things:
45170 \begin_layout Description
45172 \begin_inset space ~
45175 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45176 should use for spell checking.
45177 Depending on your platform,
45188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45190 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45205 \begin_inset space ~
45208 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45211 \begin_layout Description
45213 \begin_inset space ~
45216 language If this field is not empty,
45218 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45219 no matter what the document language is.
45222 \begin_layout Description
45224 \begin_inset space ~
45227 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45229 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45233 \begin_inset space \space{}
45237 This should normally not be needed.
45240 \begin_layout Description
45242 \begin_inset space ~
45246 \begin_inset space ~
45249 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45260 \begin_layout Description
45262 \begin_inset space ~
45265 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45266 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45267 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45268 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45269 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45272 \begin_layout Description
45274 \begin_inset space ~
45278 \begin_inset space ~
45282 \begin_inset space ~
45285 comments If enabled,
45286 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45289 \begin_layout Section
45291 \begin_inset Index idx
45296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45305 name "sec:Thesaurus"
45312 \begin_layout Standard
45314 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
45315 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
45316 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45325 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45327 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
45338 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
45342 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
45343 which are available for many languages.
45346 \begin_layout Standard
45347 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
45351 \begin_layout Subsection
45352 Setting up the thesaurus
45355 \begin_layout Standard
45364 thesauri consist of two files per language:
45365 A file with the suffix
45369 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
45374 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
45375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45388 the US English files are named:
45391 \begin_layout Itemize
45395 \begin_layout Itemize
45399 \begin_layout Standard
45408 and its thesaurus installed,
45409 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
45412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45414 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45421 ) to the path where they are installed.
45425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
45428 typical locations are
45435 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
45440 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
45445 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
45449 dictionaries are to be found at
45455 LibreOffice-<Version>
45463 the default location is
45465 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
45466 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45467 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
45468 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
45469 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45470 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45479 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
45480 installation process,
45481 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
45484 \begin_layout Standard
45485 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
45487 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
45489 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
45492 thesaurus dictionaries,
45493 you can download them from here:
45494 \begin_inset Newline newline
45498 \begin_inset Flex URL
45501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
45505 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
45506 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
45507 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
45517 \begin_layout Standard
45518 To install a new dictionary,
45519 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
45521 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45522 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45523 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45525 \begin_inset space ~
45530 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45532 If this path is not defined yet,
45533 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
45537 \begin_layout Standard
45539 you can also install new dictionaries via
45541 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45546 via your package manager (look for
45552 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
45556 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
45557 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
45559 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45565 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45566 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45567 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45574 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
45577 \begin_layout Subsection
45578 Using the thesaurus
45581 \begin_layout Standard
45582 To start the thesaurus,
45585 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45588 or the toolbar button
45591 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45594 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
45595 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
45596 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
45598 for some languages (such as English),
45599 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
45600 but also generic terms (such as
45609 related terms (such as
45612 \begin_inset space ~
45625 \begin_inset space ~
45635 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
45645 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
45648 \begin_layout Standard
45649 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
45650 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
45651 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
45654 \begin_layout Standard
45655 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
45661 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
45663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45667 \begin_inset space \space{}
45670 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
45671 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
45672 infinitive for verbs).
45674 looking up the word form
45679 while results are shown for the word form
45684 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
45685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45689 \begin_inset space \space{}
45701 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
45702 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
45703 thus the ending remains).
45706 \begin_layout Section
45708 \begin_inset Index idx
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45720 \begin_inset Index idx
45725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45727 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45744 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
45751 \begin_layout Standard
45752 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
45753 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
45754 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
45756 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45758 \begin_inset space ~
45761 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45763 \begin_inset space ~
45771 \begin_layout Standard
45772 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
45787 The color depends on the author that made the change.
45788 You can change the color in
45790 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45791 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45793 \begin_inset space ~
45797 \begin_inset space ~
45802 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45808 \begin_inset Index idx
45813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45829 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
45830 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
45831 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
45834 arg "changes-merge"
45840 \begin_layout Standard
45841 When change tracking is activated,
45842 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
45844 \begin_inset Index idx
45849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45851 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
45854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45868 \begin_layout Standard
45869 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45875 \begin_layout Standard
45876 \begin_inset Graphics
45877 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
45885 \begin_layout Standard
45886 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45892 \begin_layout Standard
45893 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
45896 \begin_layout Standard
45897 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45903 \begin_layout Standard
45904 \begin_inset Tabular
45905 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
45906 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45907 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45908 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45918 arg "changes-track"
45926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45932 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45934 \begin_inset space ~
45937 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45939 \begin_inset space ~
45948 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45957 arg "changes-output"
45965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45973 \begin_inset space ~
45976 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
45978 \begin_inset space ~
45982 \begin_inset space ~
45986 \begin_inset space ~
45995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46016 Jumps to the next change
46022 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46031 arg "change-accept"
46039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46045 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46047 \begin_inset space ~
46050 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46052 \begin_inset space ~
46061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 arg "change-reject"
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46084 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46086 \begin_inset space ~
46089 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46091 \begin_inset space ~
46100 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 arg "changes-merge"
46117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46123 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46128 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46130 \begin_inset space ~
46139 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 arg "all-changes-accept"
46156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46164 \begin_inset space ~
46167 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46169 \begin_inset space ~
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46191 arg "all-changes-reject"
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46205 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46207 \begin_inset space ~
46210 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46212 \begin_inset space ~
46216 \begin_inset space ~
46225 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46249 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46260 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46283 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46285 \begin_inset space ~
46301 \begin_layout Standard
46302 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46308 \begin_layout Standard
46309 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
46310 especially no format changes like from
46329 \begin_layout Standard
46330 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
46332 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
46333 When you merge changes,
46334 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
46335 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
46336 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
46337 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
46340 \begin_layout Standard
46341 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
46344 \begin_layout Standard
46346 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
46347 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46353 \begin_inset Index idx
46358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
46379 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46386 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46392 \begin_layout Section
46393 Comparison of Documents
46394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46396 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
46401 \begin_inset Index idx
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46407 Comparison of documents
46415 \begin_layout Standard
46416 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
46419 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46423 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
46424 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
46425 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
46426 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46433 \begin_inset space ~
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46446 \begin_inset space ~
46450 \begin_inset space ~
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_inset space ~
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46471 enables the change tracking option
46474 \begin_inset space ~
46478 \begin_inset space ~
46482 \begin_inset space ~
46487 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
46490 \begin_layout Section
46491 International Support
46492 \begin_inset Index idx
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46498 International support
46506 \begin_layout Standard
46507 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
46508 with any language you want.
46509 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46514 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
46522 \begin_layout Standard
46525 also supports phonetic symbols,
46527 \begin_inset space ~
46531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46533 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
46541 \begin_layout Subsection
46543 \begin_inset Index idx
46548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46565 \begin_inset Index idx
46570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46572 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46587 \begin_inset Index idx
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46611 \begin_layout Standard
46614 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46615 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46618 dialog lets you set
46621 the quote style and character encoding
46626 \begin_layout Standard
46631 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46636 \begin_inset space ~
46641 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
46642 For details about the different encoding options see section
46643 \begin_inset space ~
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46649 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46657 \begin_layout Subsection
46658 Keyboard mapping configuration
46659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46661 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46669 If you have for example a U.
46670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46673 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
46674 you can use an alternate keymap.
46676 if you want to write in Italian,
46677 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
46678 to use an Italian keymap.
46681 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46682 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46683 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
46686 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
46688 \begin_inset space ~
46692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46694 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46700 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
46703 \begin_layout Standard
46705 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
46709 normally write in Italian on a U.
46710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46713 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
46715 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
46716 This and many other customizations are explained in the
46723 \begin_layout Chapter
46726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46728 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
46735 \begin_layout Standard
46736 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
46737 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
46740 \begin_layout Section
46742 \begin_inset Index idx
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46749 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46766 \begin_layout Standard
46771 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
46774 \begin_layout Subsection
46778 \begin_layout Standard
46779 Creates a new document.
46782 \begin_layout Subsection
46786 \begin_layout Standard
46787 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
46788 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
46789 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
46791 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
46793 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
46798 \begin_layout Subsection
46802 \begin_layout Standard
46806 \begin_layout Subsection
46810 \begin_layout Standard
46811 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
46812 Click there on a file to open it.
46815 \begin_layout Subsection
46817 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
46821 \begin_layout Standard
46823 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
46824 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
46828 \begin_layout Subsection
46832 \begin_layout Standard
46833 Closes the current document.
46836 \begin_layout Subsection
46840 \begin_layout Standard
46841 Closes all opened documents.
46844 \begin_layout Subsection
46848 \begin_layout Standard
46849 Saves the actual document.
46852 \begin_layout Subsection
46856 \begin_layout Standard
46857 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
46858 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
46862 \begin_layout Subsection
46864 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
46868 \begin_layout Standard
46870 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
46871 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
46876 \begin_layout Subsection
46880 \begin_layout Standard
46881 Saves all opened documents.
46884 \begin_layout Subsection
46888 \begin_layout Standard
46889 Reloads the actual document from disk.
46892 \begin_layout Subsection
46896 \begin_layout Standard
46897 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
46898 It is described in the section
46900 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
46905 Additional Features
46910 \begin_layout Subsection
46914 \begin_layout Standard
46915 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
46921 plain text files and comma separated,
46922 table-like text files (CSV).
46923 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
46927 \begin_layout Standard
46928 When using the menu entry
46931 \begin_inset space ~
46937 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
46938 when using the menu entry
46941 \begin_inset space ~
46945 \begin_inset space ~
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46955 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
46956 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
46959 \begin_layout Subsection
46961 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46963 name "subsec:Export"
46970 \begin_layout Standard
46971 You can export your document to various file formats.
46972 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
46974 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
46975 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
46976 during its configuration.
46979 \begin_layout Standard
46980 Here is a list of all available entries;
46981 some of them are explained in detail in section
46982 \begin_inset space ~
46986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46988 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46996 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47005 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47010 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47011 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47012 \begin_inset Newline newline
47015 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47016 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47020 \begin_layout Description
47021 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47026 \begin_layout Description
47028 \begin_inset space ~
47031 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47036 \begin_layout Description
47037 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47038 's native DVI-format.
47039 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47041 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47048 \begin_layout Description
47049 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47052 \begin_layout Description
47054 \begin_inset space ~
47061 ) DVI-format using the program
47063 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47067 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47072 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47081 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47089 \begin_layout Description
47091 \begin_inset space ~
47094 (cropped) the same as
47098 but with cropped page margins.
47101 \begin_layout Description
47103 \begin_inset space ~
47106 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47110 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47115 \begin_layout Description
47120 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47137 \begin_layout Description
47139 \begin_inset space ~
47143 \begin_inset space ~
47146 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47151 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47158 \begin_layout Description
47162 \begin_inset space ~
47171 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47172 source that is compilable with the program
47174 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47178 \begin_layout Description
47182 \begin_inset space ~
47187 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47189 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47199 \begin_layout Description
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47208 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47210 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47211 only this format is readable by the
47218 \begin_layout Description
47222 \begin_inset space ~
47231 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47232 source that is compilable with the program
47238 \begin_layout Description
47240 \begin_inset space ~
47244 \begin_inset space ~
47251 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47252 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47257 \begin_layout Description
47259 \begin_inset space ~
47262 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47263 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47269 \begin_inset space \space{}
47274 \begin_inset space ~
47279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47294 represent the version number)
47297 \begin_layout Description
47299 \begin_inset space ~
47303 \begin_inset space ~
47306 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
47308 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47313 \begin_layout Description
47314 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
47315 's internal XHTML engine
47318 \begin_layout Description
47320 \begin_inset space ~
47324 \begin_inset space ~
47328 \begin_inset space ~
47332 \begin_inset space ~
47335 XML Office Open XML file,
47341 For the conversion the program
47350 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47353 \begin_layout Description
47354 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
47359 \begin_layout Description
47361 \begin_inset space ~
47364 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
47374 For the conversion the program
47383 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47386 \begin_layout Description
47388 \begin_inset space ~
47391 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
47392 For the conversion the program
47401 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47404 \begin_layout Description
47406 \begin_inset space ~
47409 (cropped) the same as
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47417 but with cropped page margins
47420 \begin_layout Description
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47429 PDF-format using the program
47434 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47437 \begin_layout Description
47441 \begin_inset space ~
47445 \begin_inset space ~
47453 \begin_inset space ~
47458 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
47459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47463 \begin_inset space \space{}
47466 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
47469 \begin_layout Description
47473 \begin_inset space ~
47478 PDF-format using the program
47480 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47484 produces PDF-files directly
47487 \begin_layout Description
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47496 PDF-format using the program
47501 produces PDF-files directly
47504 \begin_layout Description
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47513 PDF-format using the program
47518 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47521 \begin_layout Description
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47530 PDF-format using the program
47536 produces PDF-files directly
47539 \begin_layout Description
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47551 \begin_layout Description
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47565 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
47570 \begin_layout Description
47575 PostScript format using the program
47584 options see section
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47591 reference "subsec:General-output"
47599 \begin_layout Description
47600 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47601 source and also code in the statistical programming language
47614 it is possible to use
47618 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47622 \begin_layout Standard
47623 If one of the menu entries
47631 \begin_inset space ~
47641 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47643 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
47646 \begin_inset space ~
47650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47652 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47658 \begin_inset Index idx
47663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47664 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47673 \begin_layout Subsection
47677 \begin_layout Standard
47678 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
47681 \begin_inset space ~
47685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47687 reference "sec:Paths"
47693 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
47702 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
47703 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
47704 's preferences as described in section
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47711 reference "subsec:Converters"
47719 \begin_layout Subsection
47720 New and Close Window
47723 \begin_layout Standard
47724 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47728 \begin_layout Subsection
47732 \begin_layout Standard
47733 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
47736 \begin_layout Section
47738 \begin_inset Index idx
47743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47745 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47762 \begin_layout Subsection
47766 \begin_layout Standard
47767 Described in section
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47774 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
47782 \begin_layout Subsection
47790 \begin_layout Standard
47791 Described in section
47792 \begin_inset space ~
47796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47798 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47806 \begin_layout Subsection
47810 \begin_layout Standard
47811 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
47812 If the cursor is outside an inset,
47813 the whole document will be selected.
47816 \begin_layout Subsection
47820 \begin_layout Standard
47821 Selects the whole document.
47824 \begin_layout Subsection
47825 Find & Replace (Quick)
47828 \begin_layout Standard
47829 Described in section
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47834 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47836 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
47844 \begin_layout Subsection
47845 Find & Replace (Advanced)
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47849 Described in section
47850 \begin_inset space ~
47854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47856 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
47864 \begin_layout Subsection
47865 Move Paragraph Up/Down
47868 \begin_layout Standard
47869 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
47872 \begin_layout Subsection
47874 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47878 \begin_layout Standard
47880 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
47881 Described in section
47882 \begin_inset space ~
47886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47888 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47898 \begin_layout Subsection
47900 \begin_inset Index idx
47905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47924 \begin_layout Standard
47925 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
47926 line spacing and label width.
47927 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
47930 \begin_layout Standard
47931 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
47937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47940 \begin_inset space ~
47946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
47950 \begin_layout Subsection
47952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
47956 \begin_layout Standard
47958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
47959 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
47963 \begin_layout Enumerate
47965 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
47966 Customize text properties by means of the
47972 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
47976 this is described in section
47977 \begin_inset space ~
47981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47983 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
47991 \begin_layout Enumerate
47993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
47994 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
47996 Apply last settings
47999 \begin_layout Enumerate
48001 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48002 Change the casing of selected text (
48019 \begin_layout Subsection
48021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48025 \begin_layout Standard
48027 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48028 This sub-menu only appears
48029 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48031 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48032 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48058 \begin_inset space ~
48062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48064 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48074 \begin_layout Subsection
48075 Table and Rows & Columns
48078 \begin_layout Standard
48079 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48080 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48081 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48084 \begin_layout Subsection
48088 \begin_layout Standard
48089 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48090 It will dissolve this inset.
48091 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48094 \begin_layout Subsection
48098 \begin_layout Standard
48099 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48100 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48103 \begin_layout Subsection
48104 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48107 \begin_layout Standard
48108 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48109 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48110 \begin_inset space ~
48114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48116 reference "sec:Nesting"
48122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48124 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48132 \begin_layout Section
48134 \begin_inset Index idx
48139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48141 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48158 \begin_layout Standard
48159 At the bottom of the
48163 menu the opened documents are listed.
48166 \begin_layout Subsection
48167 Open/Close all Insets
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48171 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48174 \begin_layout Subsection
48175 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48178 \begin_layout Standard
48179 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48182 \begin_layout Standard
48183 Math macros are described in the
48190 \begin_layout Subsection
48194 \begin_layout Standard
48195 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48202 reference "sec:Navigating"
48208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48210 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48218 \begin_layout Subsection
48222 \begin_layout Standard
48223 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48224 as described in section
48225 \begin_inset space ~
48229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48231 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48239 \begin_layout Subsection
48243 \begin_layout Standard
48244 Opens a window showing console messages.
48245 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48251 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48252 is processing the document.
48255 \begin_layout Subsection
48257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48259 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48264 \begin_inset Index idx
48269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48278 \begin_layout Standard
48279 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48280 All toolbars and the
48283 \begin_inset space ~
48301 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
48303 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
48305 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
48309 \begin_layout Standard
48311 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
48315 \begin_inset space ~
48336 \begin_inset space ~
48349 \begin_inset space ~
48354 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
48357 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
48362 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
48364 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
48379 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
48380 denoted in the menu with the suffix
48389 \begin_layout Standard
48394 state the toolbar is permanently shown
48395 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
48401 state it is never shown
48408 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
48409 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
48410 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
48411 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
48413 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
48418 \begin_layout Standard
48420 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
48421 \begin_inset space ~
48425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48427 reference "sec:Toolbars"
48435 \begin_layout Subsection
48439 \begin_layout Standard
48443 \begin_inset space ~
48447 \begin_inset space ~
48451 \begin_inset space ~
48455 \begin_inset space ~
48459 \begin_inset space ~
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48468 will split \SpecialChar LyX
48469 's main window vertically while
48472 \begin_inset space ~
48476 \begin_inset space ~
48480 \begin_inset space ~
48484 \begin_inset space ~
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48492 \begin_inset space ~
48497 will split it horizontally.
48498 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
48499 or to view the same document,
48500 but at different positions.
48501 You can even split the main window several times to view,
48503 three or more documents at the same time.
48504 To close a split view,
48508 \begin_inset space ~
48512 \begin_inset space ~
48520 \begin_layout Subsection
48524 \begin_layout Standard
48525 Closes a split view.
48528 \begin_layout Subsection
48532 \begin_layout Standard
48533 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
48534 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
48535 's main window fullscreen.
48536 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
48538 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
48541 \begin_layout Section
48543 \begin_inset Index idx
48548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48550 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48567 \begin_layout Subsection
48571 \begin_layout Standard
48572 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
48573 \begin_inset space ~
48577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48579 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
48591 \begin_layout Subsection
48593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48595 name "subsec:Special-Character"
48602 \begin_layout Standard
48603 Here you can insert the following characters:
48606 \begin_layout Description
48611 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48613 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
48614 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48615 -packages you have installed.
48616 You can get a complete display by checking
48619 \begin_inset space ~
48625 \begin_inset Newline newline
48629 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 Not all characters will be visible in the
48642 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
48643 \begin_inset space ~
48647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48649 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48654 ) can display every character.
48662 \begin_layout Description
48663 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
48668 \begin_layout Description
48670 \begin_inset space ~
48674 \begin_inset space ~
48677 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
48678 \begin_inset space ~
48682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48684 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
48692 \begin_layout Description
48694 \begin_inset space ~
48697 Quote Inserts this quote:
48699 no matter what quote style you selected in the
48701 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48702 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48708 \begin_layout Description
48710 \begin_inset space ~
48713 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
48715 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48716 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48722 \begin_layout Description
48724 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
48726 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
48730 \begin_inset space ~
48733 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
48734 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
48736 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
48740 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
48744 \begin_layout Description
48746 \begin_inset space ~
48749 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
48750 \SpecialChar breakableslash
48754 \begin_layout Description
48756 \begin_inset space ~
48760 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
48761 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
48767 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48772 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
48774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48778 \begin_inset space \space{}
48781 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
48782 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
48789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48792 To insert a fraction use the command
48797 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
48801 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
48807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48810 The visible space is hereby the character before the
48817 \begin_layout Description
48819 \begin_inset space ~
48822 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
48823 \SpecialChar menuseparator
48827 \begin_layout Description
48829 \begin_inset space ~
48833 \begin_inset Index idx
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48845 \begin_inset Index idx
48850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48852 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48866 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
48867 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48873 \begin_inset Index idx
48878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48881 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48896 \begin_inset Newline newline
48899 More information about this feature can be found in the
48905 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
48911 \begin_layout Description
48912 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
48917 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
48921 \begin_layout Subsection
48925 \begin_layout Standard
48926 Opens a submenu with the following options:
48929 \begin_layout Description
48930 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
48932 \begin_inset script superscript
48934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48944 \begin_layout Description
48945 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
48947 \begin_inset script subscript
48949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48958 \begin_layout Description
48960 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
48962 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
48966 \begin_inset space ~
48970 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
48972 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
48975 space as described in section
48976 \begin_inset space ~
48980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48982 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
48990 \begin_layout Description
48992 \begin_inset space ~
48995 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
48996 \begin_inset space ~
49000 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49004 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49010 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49014 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49024 \begin_layout Description
49026 \begin_inset space ~
49029 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49030 \begin_inset space ~
49034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49036 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49044 \begin_layout Description
49046 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49048 \begin_inset space ~
49051 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49057 \begin_inset space \space{}
49060 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49061 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49071 To insert a fraction use the command
49076 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49080 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49089 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49098 \begin_layout Description
49100 \begin_inset space ~
49103 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49104 \begin_inset space ~
49108 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49110 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49118 \begin_layout Description
49120 \begin_inset space ~
49123 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49124 \begin_inset space ~
49128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49130 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49138 \begin_layout Description
49140 \begin_inset space ~
49143 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49144 \begin_inset space ~
49148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49150 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49158 \begin_layout Description
49159 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49160 \begin_inset space ~
49164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49166 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49174 \begin_layout Description
49176 \begin_inset space ~
49179 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49180 \begin_inset space ~
49184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49186 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49194 \begin_layout Description
49196 \begin_inset space ~
49199 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49200 \begin_inset space ~
49204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49206 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49214 \begin_layout Description
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49220 \begin_inset space ~
49223 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49225 \begin_inset space ~
49229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49231 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49239 for a usage example.
49242 \begin_layout Description
49244 \begin_inset space ~
49248 \begin_inset space ~
49251 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49252 \begin_inset space ~
49256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49258 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49266 \begin_layout Description
49268 \begin_inset space ~
49271 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49272 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49275 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49276 \begin_inset space ~
49280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49282 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49290 \begin_layout Description
49292 \begin_inset space ~
49295 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
49296 \begin_inset space ~
49300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49302 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49310 \begin_layout Description
49312 \begin_inset space ~
49315 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
49316 as described in section
49317 \begin_inset space ~
49321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49323 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49329 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
49333 \begin_layout Description
49335 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49341 \begin_inset space ~
49344 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49345 to prevent a page break at the given position.
49347 \begin_inset space ~
49351 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
49353 \begin_inset space ~
49357 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49361 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
49371 \begin_layout Description
49373 \begin_inset space ~
49376 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
49377 \begin_inset space ~
49381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49383 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49391 \begin_layout Description
49393 \begin_inset space ~
49397 \begin_inset space ~
49400 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
49401 \begin_inset space ~
49405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49407 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49415 \begin_layout Subsection
49417 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49421 \begin_layout Standard
49423 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49424 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
49425 The submenu allows you to insert
49428 \begin_layout Description
49430 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49432 \begin_inset space ~
49435 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
49438 \begin_layout Description
49440 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49442 \begin_inset space ~
49446 \begin_inset space ~
49449 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
49452 \begin_layout Description
49454 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49456 \begin_inset space ~
49459 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
49462 \begin_layout Description
49464 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49466 \begin_inset space ~
49469 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
49472 \begin_layout Description
49474 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49476 \begin_inset space ~
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49483 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
49486 \begin_layout Description
49488 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49490 \begin_inset space ~
49493 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
49496 \begin_layout Description
49498 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
49500 \begin_inset space ~
49504 \begin_inset space ~
49508 \begin_inset space ~
49511 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
49514 \begin_layout Description
49516 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
49518 \begin_inset space ~
49522 \begin_inset space ~
49525 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
49527 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
49530 \begin_layout Description
49532 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49534 \begin_inset space ~
49537 Name inserts the user name as specified in
49539 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49540 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49546 \begin_layout Description
49548 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49550 \begin_inset space ~
49553 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
49555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49556 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49562 \begin_layout Description
49564 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49565 Other\SpecialChar ldots
49566 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
49569 \begin_layout Subsection
49572 List/Contents/References
49575 \begin_layout Standard
49576 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
49580 \begin_inset space ~
49604 are described in section
49605 \begin_inset space ~
49609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49611 reference "sec:toc"
49621 is described in section
49622 \begin_inset space ~
49626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49628 reference "sec:Index"
49638 is described in section
49639 \begin_inset space ~
49643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49645 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49652 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49655 is described in section
49656 \begin_inset space ~
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49662 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49670 \begin_layout Subsection
49674 \begin_layout Standard
49676 as described in section
49677 \begin_inset space ~
49681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49683 reference "sec:Floats"
49688 and in detail the chapter
49695 \begin_inset space ~
49703 \begin_layout Subsection
49707 \begin_layout Standard
49709 described in section
49710 \begin_inset space ~
49714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49716 reference "sec:Notes"
49724 \begin_layout Subsection
49728 \begin_layout Standard
49729 Inserts a branch inset,
49731 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
49732 Branches are described in section
49733 \begin_inset space ~
49737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49739 reference "sec:Branches"
49747 \begin_layout Subsection
49751 \begin_layout Standard
49752 Inserts document class-specific insets.
49753 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
49754 An example is the document class
49755 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
49757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49765 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
49769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49774 with three custom insets.
49777 Flex insets and InsetLayout
49781 Installing New Document Classes,
49782 The Layout file format
49788 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
49791 \begin_layout Subsection
49793 \begin_inset Index idx
49798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49807 \begin_layout Standard
49808 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
49809 For more information see chapter
49811 External Document Parts
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49820 \begin_layout Subsection
49822 \begin_inset Index idx
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49836 \begin_layout Standard
49837 Inserts a box in a certain style.
49838 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
49845 \begin_inset space ~
49853 \begin_layout Subsection
49857 \begin_layout Standard
49862 dialog as described in section
49863 \begin_inset space ~
49867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49869 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49877 \begin_layout Subsection
49881 \begin_layout Standard
49886 as described in section
49887 \begin_inset space ~
49891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49893 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49901 \begin_layout Subsection
49905 \begin_layout Standard
49910 as described in section
49911 \begin_inset space ~
49915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49917 reference "sec:Cross-References"
49925 \begin_layout Subsection
49927 \begin_inset Index idx
49932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49939 \begin_inset Index idx
49944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49946 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49973 \begin_layout Standard
49974 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
49975 Floats are described in section
49976 \begin_inset space ~
49980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49982 reference "sec:Floats"
49988 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
49991 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
49999 \begin_inset space ~
50007 \begin_layout Subsection
50011 \begin_layout Standard
50012 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50013 \begin_inset space ~
50017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50019 reference "sec:Index"
50027 \begin_layout Subsection
50031 \begin_layout Standard
50032 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50033 \begin_inset space ~
50037 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50039 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50047 \begin_layout Subsection
50051 \begin_layout Standard
50052 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50053 Tables are described in section
50054 \begin_inset space ~
50058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50060 reference "sec:Tables"
50065 and in detail in the chapter
50072 \begin_inset space ~
50080 \begin_layout Subsection
50084 \begin_layout Standard
50090 Graphics are described in section
50091 \begin_inset space ~
50095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50097 reference "sec:Graphics"
50105 \begin_layout Subsection
50109 \begin_layout Standard
50110 Inserts a URL as described in section
50111 \begin_inset space ~
50115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50117 reference "subsec:URLs"
50125 \begin_layout Subsection
50129 \begin_layout Standard
50130 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50131 \begin_inset space ~
50135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50137 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50145 \begin_layout Subsection
50149 \begin_layout Standard
50150 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50151 \begin_inset space ~
50155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50157 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50165 \begin_layout Subsection
50169 \begin_layout Standard
50170 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50171 \begin_inset space ~
50175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50177 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50185 \begin_layout Subsection
50188 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50191 \begin_layout Standard
50192 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50194 \begin_inset space ~
50198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50200 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50205 for an explanation.
50208 \begin_layout Subsection
50212 \begin_layout Standard
50213 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50214 in or behind a section heading,
50215 title or caption of a float.
50216 Inserts a short title as described in section
50217 \begin_inset space ~
50221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50223 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50231 \begin_layout Subsection
50236 \begin_layout Standard
50237 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50238 Code box as described in section
50239 \begin_inset space ~
50243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50245 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50253 \begin_layout Subsection
50255 \begin_inset Index idx
50260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50269 \begin_layout Standard
50270 Inserts a program listings box.
50271 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50273 Program Code Listings
50278 \begin_inset space ~
50286 \begin_layout Subsection
50288 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50292 \begin_layout Standard
50294 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50295 Inserts the actual date.
50296 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
50302 \begin_layout Subsection
50306 \begin_layout Standard
50307 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
50308 \begin_inset space ~
50312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50314 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50322 \begin_layout Section
50324 \begin_inset Index idx
50329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50331 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50348 \begin_layout Standard
50349 This menu lists the existing chapters,
50354 \begin_inset space ~
50357 of the current document.
50358 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
50361 \begin_layout Subsection
50365 \begin_layout Standard
50366 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
50367 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
50370 \begin_inset space ~
50374 To create bookmarks for this example,
50376 \begin_inset space ~
50379 2.5 and use the submenu
50382 \begin_inset space ~
50386 \begin_inset space ~
50393 \begin_inset space ~
50399 \begin_inset space ~
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50409 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
50412 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
50418 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
50421 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
50424 \begin_layout Standard
50426 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
50427 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
50433 \begin_inset space ~
50438 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
50441 \begin_inset space ~
50446 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
50449 \begin_layout Subsection
50455 \begin_layout Standard
50456 Jump to the next note,
50458 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
50461 \begin_layout Subsection
50465 \begin_layout Standard
50466 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
50467 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
50468 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
50471 \begin_inset space ~
50475 \begin_inset space ~
50483 \begin_layout Subsection
50487 \begin_layout Standard
50488 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
50491 The \SpecialChar LyX
50492 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
50494 \begin_inset space ~
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50507 manual for a detailed description.
50510 \begin_layout Section
50512 \begin_inset Index idx
50517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50519 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50536 \begin_layout Subsection
50540 \begin_layout Standard
50541 Change Tracking is described in section
50542 \begin_inset space ~
50546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50548 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50556 \begin_layout Subsection
50564 \begin_layout Standard
50565 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
50566 by viewing or exporting a document,
50567 this menu will be enabled.
50568 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50570 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
50572 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
50573 \begin_inset Newline newline
50576 With the help of the logfile,
50577 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50581 \begin_layout Standard
50584 Open Containing Directory
50586 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
50587 's temporary folder for the document.
50588 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
50589 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
50590 For example some journals require to send the
50594 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50598 \begin_layout Subsection
50599 Start Appendix Here
50602 \begin_layout Standard
50603 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50610 reference "sec:Appendices"
50618 \begin_layout Subsection
50620 \begin_inset space ~
50626 \begin_layout Standard
50627 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
50629 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50630 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50631 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50633 \begin_inset space ~
50637 \begin_inset space ~
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50650 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50655 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
50658 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50659 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50661 \begin_inset space ~
50664 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50666 \begin_inset space ~
50669 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50671 \begin_inset space ~
50675 \begin_inset space ~
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50688 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50693 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
50694 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50696 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50697 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50699 \begin_inset space ~
50702 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50704 \begin_inset space ~
50707 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50712 \begin_inset space ~
50716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50718 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50724 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50725 when it is first configured.
50726 The default output format is
50729 \begin_inset space ~
50737 \begin_layout Subsection
50738 View (Other Formats)
50741 \begin_layout Standard
50742 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
50743 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
50744 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
50745 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50746 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
50748 All possible formats are listed in section
50749 \begin_inset space ~
50753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50755 reference "subsec:Export"
50761 You should at least see the menu entry
50767 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
50769 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50777 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
50783 \begin_inset Index idx
50788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
50798 \begin_layout Standard
50799 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
50800 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50802 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50803 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50805 \begin_inset space ~
50808 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50810 \begin_inset space ~
50813 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50818 \begin_inset space ~
50822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50824 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50830 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
50831 when it is first configured.
50834 \begin_layout Subsection
50836 \begin_inset space ~
50842 \begin_layout Standard
50843 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
50846 \begin_layout Subsection
50847 Update (Other Formats)
50850 \begin_layout Standard
50851 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
50854 \begin_layout Subsection
50855 View Master Document
50858 \begin_layout Standard
50859 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50875 \begin_inset space ~
50880 manual for more information on this topic).
50881 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
50883 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
50887 \begin_inset space ~
50891 \begin_inset space ~
50896 generates the output of the whole book,
50901 will just output the chapter alone.
50904 \begin_layout Standard
50905 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
50907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50909 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50911 \begin_inset space ~
50915 \begin_inset space ~
50922 \begin_inset space ~
50926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50928 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50933 ) or in the preferences (menu
50935 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50936 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50938 \begin_inset space ~
50941 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50943 \begin_inset space ~
50946 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50948 \begin_inset space ~
50952 \begin_inset space ~
50959 \begin_inset space ~
50963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50965 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50973 \begin_layout Subsection
50974 Update Master Document
50977 \begin_layout Standard
50978 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
50980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50994 \begin_inset space ~
50999 manual for more information on this topic).
51000 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51003 \begin_layout Standard
51004 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51006 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51007 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51008 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51010 \begin_inset space ~
51014 \begin_inset space ~
51021 \begin_inset space ~
51025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51027 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51032 ) or in the preferences (menu
51034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51035 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51037 \begin_inset space ~
51040 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51042 \begin_inset space ~
51045 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51047 \begin_inset space ~
51051 \begin_inset space ~
51058 \begin_inset space ~
51062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51064 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51072 \begin_layout Subsection
51074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51076 name "subsec:Compressed"
51083 \begin_layout Standard
51084 Un/compresses the current document.
51085 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51087 Additional Features
51089 manual for details).
51092 \begin_layout Subsection
51096 \begin_layout Standard
51097 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51100 \begin_layout Subsection
51104 \begin_layout Standard
51105 The document settings are described in appendix
51106 \begin_inset space ~
51110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51112 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51120 \begin_layout Section
51122 \begin_inset Index idx
51127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51129 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51146 \begin_layout Subsection
51150 \begin_layout Standard
51151 Spell checking is explained in section
51152 \begin_inset space ~
51156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51158 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51166 \begin_layout Subsection
51170 \begin_layout Standard
51171 The thesaurus is described in section
51172 \begin_inset space ~
51176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51178 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51186 \begin_layout Subsection
51188 \begin_inset Index idx
51193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51200 \begin_inset Index idx
51205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51214 \begin_layout Standard
51215 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51218 \begin_layout Subsection
51224 \begin_inset Index idx
51229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51230 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51239 \begin_layout Standard
51240 Generates with the help of the program
51242 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51245 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51246 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51247 This feature is not available on Windows.
51250 \begin_layout Subsection
51256 \begin_inset Index idx
51261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51271 \begin_layout Standard
51272 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51277 \begin_inset space ~
51282 to see the full filename paths.
51285 \begin_layout Subsection
51287 \begin_inset Index idx
51292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51301 \begin_layout Standard
51302 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
51303 files as described in section
51304 \begin_inset space ~
51308 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51310 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
51318 \begin_layout Subsection
51320 \begin_inset Index idx
51325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51328 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51338 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
51341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51342 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51354 \begin_inset Index idx
51359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51360 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51369 \begin_layout Standard
51370 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
51374 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51375 -packages and programs it needs;
51377 \begin_inset space ~
51381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51383 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51391 \begin_layout Subsection
51395 \begin_layout Standard
51400 dialog as described in detail in appendix
51401 \begin_inset space ~
51405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51407 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
51415 \begin_layout Section
51417 \begin_inset Index idx
51422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51424 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51441 \begin_layout Standard
51442 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
51443 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
51445 If a file is not available in this language,
51446 the English version will be listed.
51449 \begin_layout Standard
51453 \begin_inset space ~
51458 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
51459 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51460 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
51462 \begin_inset space ~
51466 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51468 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
51476 \begin_layout Standard
51480 \begin_inset space ~
51485 gives information about the copyright,
51486 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
51487 version you are using.
51490 \begin_layout Section
51492 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51494 name "sec:Toolbars"
51501 \begin_layout Standard
51502 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
51503 \begin_inset space ~
51507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51509 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
51517 \begin_layout Standard
51518 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
51519 This is described in the
51521 Additional Features
51526 \begin_layout Subsection
51528 \begin_inset Index idx
51533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51535 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51552 \begin_layout Standard
51553 \begin_inset Graphics
51554 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
51562 \begin_layout Standard
51563 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51569 \begin_layout Standard
51570 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51586 \begin_inset Note Note
51589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51590 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
51595 manual for more information.
51603 \begin_layout Standard
51604 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51610 \begin_layout Standard
51611 \begin_inset Tabular
51612 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
51613 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51614 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51621 \begin_inset Graphics
51622 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
51632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51636 pull-down box for the environments
51649 \begin_layout Standard
51650 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
51656 \begin_layout Standard
51658 \begin_inset Tabular
51659 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
51660 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51661 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51662 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51686 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51746 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51762 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
51770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51776 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51783 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51792 arg "spelling-continuously"
51800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51804 Spellcheck continuously
51810 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51833 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51893 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51923 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51955 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
51960 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51969 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51978 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
51986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51992 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
51994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52018 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52032 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52060 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52074 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52075 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52082 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52105 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52108 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52110 \begin_inset space ~
52113 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52121 arg "dialog-show character"
52132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52153 Set text to noun style,
52155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52160 \begin_inset space ~
52163 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52171 arg "dialog-show character"
52182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52188 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52191 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52204 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52207 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52220 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52225 arg "textstyle-apply"
52235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52240 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52241 Format text using the current settings in the
52243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52245 \begin_inset space ~
52248 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52259 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52283 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52285 \begin_inset space ~
52294 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52303 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
52311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52317 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52324 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52331 arg "tabular-insert"
52339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52345 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52358 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
52361 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
52369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52374 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
52377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52384 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52393 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
52401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52405 Toggle outline window on/off,
52408 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
52415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52424 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
52432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52436 Toggle math toolbar on/off
52442 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52451 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
52459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52463 Toggle table toolbar on/off
52476 \begin_layout Subsection
52478 \begin_inset Index idx
52483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52485 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52502 \begin_layout Standard
52503 \begin_inset Graphics
52504 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
52512 \begin_layout Standard
52513 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52519 \begin_layout Standard
52520 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52523 \begin_layout Standard
52524 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52530 \begin_layout Standard
52531 \begin_inset Tabular
52532 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
52533 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52534 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52535 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52572 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
52580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52599 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
52607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52617 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52626 arg "layout-toggle List"
52634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52644 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52653 arg "layout-toggle Description"
52661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52671 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52680 arg "depth-increment"
52688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52694 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52696 \begin_inset space ~
52700 \begin_inset space ~
52709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52718 arg "depth-decrement"
52726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52734 \begin_inset space ~
52738 \begin_inset space ~
52747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52756 arg "float-insert figure"
52764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52771 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52787 arg "float-insert table"
52795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52802 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
52809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52848 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
52856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52878 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
52886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52924 \begin_inset space ~
52933 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52942 arg "nomencl-insert"
52950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52956 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52958 \begin_inset space ~
52967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52976 arg "footnote-insert"
52984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53006 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53020 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53022 \begin_inset space ~
53031 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53055 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53057 \begin_inset space ~
53066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53075 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53149 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53151 \begin_inset space ~
53160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53169 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53184 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53200 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53215 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53217 \begin_inset space ~
53226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53235 arg "dialog-show character"
53243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53249 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53251 \begin_inset space ~
53254 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53267 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53272 arg "textstyle-apply"
53280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53285 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53286 Format text using the recent settings in the
53289 arg "dialog-show character"
53298 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53307 arg "layout-paragraph"
53315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53321 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53323 \begin_inset space ~
53332 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53341 arg "thesaurus-entry"
53349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53355 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53369 \begin_layout Subsection
53370 View/Update Toolbar
53371 \begin_inset Index idx
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53395 \begin_layout Standard
53396 \begin_inset Graphics
53397 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
53404 \begin_layout Standard
53405 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53411 \begin_layout Standard
53412 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53415 \begin_layout Standard
53416 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53422 \begin_layout Standard
53423 \begin_inset Tabular
53424 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
53425 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53426 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53427 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53467 arg "buffer-update"
53475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53481 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53497 arg "master-buffer-view"
53505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53511 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53513 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
53515 \begin_inset space ~
53521 \begin_inset space ~
53530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53539 arg "master-buffer-update"
53547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53555 \begin_inset space ~
53559 \begin_inset space ~
53568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53577 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
53585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53592 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53594 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
53596 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
53599 \SpecialChar menuseparator
53600 Synchronize with Output
53606 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53617 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
53627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53634 View (Other Formats)
53640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53647 arg "update-others"
53651 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
53659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53666 Update (Other Formats)
53679 \begin_layout Standard
53681 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
53682 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
53687 \begin_layout Subsection
53691 \begin_layout Standard
53692 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
53693 \begin_inset space ~
53697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53699 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
53706 \begin_inset Index idx
53711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53730 \begin_inset space ~
53735 manual and the math macro toolbar
53736 \begin_inset Index idx
53741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53743 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53764 \begin_layout Chapter
53765 The Document Settings
53766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53768 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
53773 \begin_inset Index idx
53778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53797 \begin_layout Standard
53801 \begin_inset space ~
53806 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
53808 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53812 You can save your document settings as default with the
53814 Save as Document Defaults
53816 button in any dialog.
53817 This will create a template named
53821 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
53822 when you create a new document without using a template.
53825 \begin_layout Standard
53830 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
53831 This affects mostly class options,
53832 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
53835 \begin_layout Standard
53836 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
53837 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
53838 To find a setting quicker,
53839 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
53841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53845 \begin_inset space \space{}
53849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53853 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53857 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
53858 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
53859 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
53862 \begin_layout Section
53866 \begin_layout Standard
53867 Here you set the document class,
53870 and a master document.
53871 Document classes are described in section
53872 \begin_inset space ~
53876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53878 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
53886 \begin_layout Standard
53890 \begin_inset space ~
53895 you can load you own layout-file,
53896 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
53901 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
53902 as a layout for a document class.
53903 For more about layout-files,
53906 Installing New Document Classes,
53907 Types of Layout Files
53916 \begin_layout Standard
53917 Some classes use special class options by default.
53918 If this is the case,
53919 they are listed in the field
53923 and you can decide to use them or not.
53924 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
53925 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
53930 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
53932 color and page layout packages.
53938 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53940 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
53944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53945 When you want to use one of the following drivers
53946 \begin_inset Newline newline
53960 \begin_inset Newline newline
53963 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
53970 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53972 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
53985 \begin_layout Standard
53990 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
53991 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
53992 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
53993 This way child documents are always compilable.
53994 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54001 \begin_inset space ~
54009 \begin_layout Standard
54010 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54020 \begin_inset Index idx
54025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54028 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54043 \begin_inset Index idx
54048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54051 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54065 for cross-references,
54067 \begin_inset space ~
54071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54073 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54081 \begin_layout Section
54085 \begin_layout Standard
54086 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54087 Please refer to the section
54090 \begin_inset space ~
54098 \begin_inset space ~
54103 manual for details.
54106 \begin_layout Section
54110 \begin_layout Standard
54111 Modules are explained in section
54112 \begin_inset space ~
54116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54118 reference "subsec:Modules"
54126 \begin_layout Section
54130 \begin_layout Standard
54132 \begin_inset space ~
54136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54138 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54146 \begin_layout Section
54150 \begin_layout Standard
54151 The document font settings are described in section
54152 \begin_inset space ~
54156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54158 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54166 \begin_layout Section
54170 \begin_layout Standard
54171 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54183 \begin_inset space ~
54188 and whether it should be a
54191 \begin_inset space ~
54196 can also be specified here.
54199 \begin_layout Standard
54200 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54201 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54202 That would be impractical,
54204 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54206 it will be as you specified in the output.
54209 \begin_layout Standard
54212 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54215 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54216 justifies the text on screen.
54217 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54219 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54223 \begin_layout Standard
54225 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54234 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54239 \begin_layout Section
54243 \begin_layout Standard
54244 This dialog is described in sections
54245 \begin_inset space ~
54249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54251 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54259 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54267 \begin_layout Section
54271 \begin_layout Standard
54272 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54273 \begin_inset space ~
54277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54279 reference "subsec:Margins"
54287 \begin_layout Section
54289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54291 name "sec:Language-encodings"
54296 \begin_inset Index idx
54301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54303 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54320 \begin_layout Standard
54321 The document language and quote styles are set here.
54322 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54323 (the \SpecialChar LyX
54324 file is always encoded in utf8).
54325 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
54326 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54327 -command is not known for a particular character).
54328 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
54332 \begin_layout Standard
54334 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
54337 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
54338 files in Unicode – or utf8,
54339 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
54340 's default encoding).
54341 This should normally fit your needs,
54342 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
54343 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
54344 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
54345 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
54347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54355 encodings is necessary.
54358 \begin_layout Standard
54360 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
54362 provides support for these traditional encodings.
54365 Traditional (auto-selected)
54373 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
54375 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54379 \begin_layout Standard
54381 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54382 If you use the option
54388 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
54391 If the document contains text in more than one language you
54392 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
54395 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54398 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
54399 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
54400 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
54405 \begin_layout Standard
54407 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
54416 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54418 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
54422 \begin_layout Standard
54424 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
54426 you can also select
54431 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
54432 Note that this encoding is then used for
54437 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
54440 \begin_layout Standard
54442 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54444 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
54448 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
54449 Do not load inputenc
54450 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54454 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
54456 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
54458 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54460 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
54461 in the next dropdown menu
54462 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54463 does what it states:
54465 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
54467 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
54469 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54470 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
54471 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54477 \begin_inset Index idx
54482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54484 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54489 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54494 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54508 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
54510 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54512 Note that this option is only available for the standard
54518 Traditional (auto-selected)
54525 \begin_layout Standard
54527 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
54529 also supports Unicode output,
54530 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
54532 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54533 installation supports Unicode),
54534 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
54535 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54536 is quite incomplete,
54537 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
54541 (when \SpecialChar LyX
54542 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54544 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54545 -commands is not used,
54546 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
54547 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54548 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54550 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54552 Both engines support Unicode natively.
54554 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
54557 \begin_inset space ~
54566 \begin_inset space ~
54574 \begin_inset space ~
54581 \begin_inset space ~
54585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54587 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
54593 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
54598 you might try out one of these new engines.
54603 \begin_layout Standard
54607 \begin_inset space ~
54612 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54613 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
54614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54622 The possible settings are:
54625 \begin_layout Description
54626 Default uses the language package that is selected in
54628 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54629 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54633 \begin_inset space ~
54637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54639 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54647 \begin_layout Description
54648 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
54649 In many cases this will be
54654 \begin_inset Index idx
54659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54662 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54677 If the newer package
54682 \begin_inset Index idx
54687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54690 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54704 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54705 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54706 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
54708 this package will be used instead of
54715 \begin_layout Description
54717 \begin_inset space ~
54728 would be more appropriate.
54731 \begin_layout Description
54732 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
54733 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
54737 (for German texts),
54741 \begin_inset Newline newline
54746 usepackage{ngerman}
54749 \begin_layout Description
54750 None will not use a language package.
54751 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
54754 \begin_layout Standard
54755 Here is a list with the important encodings:
54758 \begin_layout Description
54760 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
54762 \begin_inset space ~
54766 \begin_inset space ~
54770 \begin_inset space ~
54778 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54784 \begin_inset Index idx
54789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54792 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54808 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54814 \begin_layout Description
54815 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
54816 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
54818 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
54820 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
54821 -commands are needed.
54823 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
54824 This is the same as the
54837 \begin_layout Description
54839 \begin_inset space ~
54843 \begin_inset space ~
54846 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
54849 \begin_layout Description
54851 \begin_inset space ~
54855 \begin_inset space ~
54858 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
54861 \begin_layout Description
54863 \begin_inset space ~
54866 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
54869 \begin_layout Description
54871 \begin_inset space ~
54875 \begin_inset space ~
54878 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
54879 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54880 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54883 \begin_layout Description
54885 \begin_inset space ~
54889 \begin_inset space ~
54892 8859-13) for Estonian,
54893 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54894 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
54897 \begin_layout Description
54899 \begin_inset space ~
54903 \begin_inset space ~
54906 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
54907 Latvian and Lithuanian,
54908 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
54911 \begin_layout Description
54913 \begin_inset space ~
54917 \begin_inset space ~
54921 \begin_inset space ~
54924 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
54925 \begin_inset space ~
54931 \begin_layout Description
54933 \begin_inset space ~
54937 \begin_inset space ~
54941 \begin_inset space ~
54944 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
54951 Slovak and Slovenian
54954 \begin_layout Description
54956 \begin_inset space ~
54960 \begin_inset space ~
54963 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
54964 used especially on UNIX OSes,
54965 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54966 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54967 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54968 \begin_inset space ~
54972 \begin_inset space ~
54978 \begin_layout Description
54980 \begin_inset space ~
54984 \begin_inset space ~
54987 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
54988 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
54989 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
54990 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54991 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
54992 \begin_inset space ~
54996 \begin_inset space ~
55002 \begin_layout Description
55004 \begin_inset space ~
55008 \begin_inset space ~
55011 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55014 \begin_layout Description
55016 \begin_inset space ~
55020 \begin_inset space ~
55023 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55026 \begin_layout Description
55028 \begin_inset space ~
55032 \begin_inset space ~
55035 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55038 Serbian and Ukrainian
55041 \begin_layout Description
55043 \begin_inset space ~
55046 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55049 \begin_layout Description
55051 \begin_inset space ~
55054 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55057 \begin_layout Description
55059 \begin_inset space ~
55063 \begin_inset space ~
55066 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55069 \begin_layout Description
55071 \begin_inset space ~
55075 \begin_inset space ~
55081 \begin_layout Description
55083 \begin_inset space ~
55087 \begin_inset space ~
55090 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55091 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55094 \begin_layout Description
55096 \begin_inset space ~
55100 \begin_inset space ~
55106 \begin_layout Description
55108 \begin_inset space ~
55112 \begin_inset space ~
55115 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55116 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55122 \begin_inset Index idx
55127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55130 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55146 set the document language to
55151 \begin_layout Description
55153 \begin_inset space ~
55157 \begin_inset space ~
55160 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55161 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55168 set the document language to
55171 \begin_inset space ~
55177 \begin_layout Description
55179 \begin_inset space ~
55183 \begin_inset space ~
55186 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55187 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55193 \begin_inset Index idx
55198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55201 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55217 set the document language to
55222 \begin_layout Description
55224 \begin_inset space ~
55228 \begin_inset space ~
55231 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55232 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55239 set the document language to
55244 \begin_layout Description
55246 \begin_inset space ~
55250 \begin_inset space ~
55253 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55254 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55261 set the document language to
55266 \begin_layout Description
55268 \begin_inset space ~
55271 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55274 \begin_layout Description
55276 \begin_inset space ~
55280 \begin_inset space ~
55284 \begin_inset space ~
55287 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
55289 Maltese and Turkish
55292 \begin_layout Description
55294 \begin_inset space ~
55298 \begin_inset space ~
55302 \begin_inset space ~
55305 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
55314 Romanian and Slovenian,
55315 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
55318 \begin_layout Description
55320 \begin_inset space ~
55324 \begin_inset space ~
55330 \begin_layout Description
55332 \begin_inset space ~
55336 \begin_inset space ~
55339 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
55340 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
55343 \begin_layout Description
55345 \begin_inset space ~
55349 \begin_inset space ~
55352 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55358 \begin_inset Index idx
55363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55366 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55380 (for the languages Chinese,
55381 Japanese and Korean)
55382 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
55384 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55385 with the default encoding (
55387 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55393 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
55394 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55399 \begin_layout Description
55401 \begin_inset space ~
55409 \begin_inset space ~
55412 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
55419 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55423 which use Unicode directly,
55424 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55431 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55432 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55434 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55437 \begin_layout Description
55439 \begin_inset space ~
55443 \begin_inset space ~
55446 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55452 \begin_inset Index idx
55457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55460 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55475 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
55481 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
55483 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
55484 This used to be more comprehensive than
55487 \begin_inset space ~
55493 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
55498 \begin_layout Description
55500 \begin_inset space ~
55503 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55509 \begin_inset Index idx
55514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55517 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55533 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
55534 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
55535 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
55536 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55537 with the default encoding (
55539 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55545 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
55546 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55551 \begin_layout Description
55553 \begin_inset space ~
55557 \begin_inset space ~
55561 \begin_inset space ~
55564 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
55565 \begin_inset space ~
55571 \begin_layout Description
55573 \begin_inset space ~
55577 \begin_inset space ~
55581 \begin_inset space ~
55584 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
55599 Spanish and Swedish;
55600 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
55603 \begin_layout Description
55605 \begin_inset space ~
55609 \begin_inset space ~
55613 \begin_inset space ~
55616 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
55617 but with the Euro currency sign,
55618 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
55621 \begin_layout Section
55623 \begin_inset Index idx
55628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55630 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55645 \begin_inset Index idx
55650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55652 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55667 \begin_inset Index idx
55672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55689 \begin_inset Index idx
55694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55696 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55713 \begin_layout Standard
55714 Here you can alter the font color for the
55723 \begin_inset space ~
55729 light grey)for the background color for the
55737 \begin_inset space ~
55748 sets the color back to the default.
55751 \begin_layout Standard
55752 Clicking any button showing
55760 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
55761 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
55764 \begin_layout Standard
55769 \begin_inset space ~
55774 font color and use the option
55777 \begin_inset space ~
55782 in the document settings under
55785 \begin_inset space ~
55791 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
55792 \begin_inset space ~
55796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55798 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
55806 \begin_layout Standard
55807 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
55813 \begin_layout Standard
55817 \begin_inset space ~
55826 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
55828 \begin_inset space ~
55831 Code after a forced page break:
55834 \begin_layout Itemize
55835 For the page color:
55836 \begin_inset Newline newline
55843 pagecolor{color name}
55846 \begin_layout Itemize
55847 For the text color:
55848 \begin_inset Newline newline
55858 \begin_layout Standard
55859 You are restricted to one of
55901 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
55908 \begin_inset space ~
55914 \begin_inset Newline newline
55917 If you have changed a text or background color,
55918 you can use the following names to refer to them:
55921 \begin_layout Itemize
55927 \begin_inset Newline newline
55932 page_backgroundcolor
55935 \begin_layout Itemize
55939 \begin_inset space ~
55945 \begin_inset Newline newline
55953 \begin_layout Itemize
55957 \begin_inset space ~
55963 \begin_inset Newline newline
55971 \begin_layout Itemize
55975 \begin_inset space ~
55981 \begin_inset Newline newline
55989 \begin_layout Standard
55990 To see how to define and use custom colors,
55994 \begin_inset space ~
56002 \begin_inset space ~
56010 \begin_layout Section
56012 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56016 \begin_layout Standard
56018 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56019 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56020 \begin_inset space ~
56024 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56026 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56035 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56036 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56039 \begin_layout Standard
56041 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56044 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56047 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56049 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56050 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56051 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56054 \begin_layout Section
56058 \begin_layout Standard
56059 Here you can adjust the
56063 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56067 as described in section
56068 \begin_inset space ~
56072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56074 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56080 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56084 \begin_layout Standard
56086 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56087 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56088 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56089 The most common one are:
56092 \begin_layout Description
56094 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56095 right Line numbers to the right margin
56098 \begin_layout Description
56100 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56101 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56105 \begin_layout Description
56107 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56108 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56111 \begin_layout Description
56113 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56114 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56117 \begin_layout Description
56119 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56120 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56123 \begin_layout Description
56125 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56127 \begin_inset space ~
56130 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56135 \begin_layout Section
56139 \begin_layout Standard
56140 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56146 \begin_inset Index idx
56151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56154 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56174 \begin_inset Index idx
56179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56182 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56201 \begin_inset Index idx
56206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56209 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56224 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56228 Sectioned bibliography
56230 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56236 \begin_inset Index idx
56241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56244 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56264 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56266 you can select a document-specific
56270 for the generation of the bibliography.
56271 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56272 \begin_inset space ~
56276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56278 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56286 \begin_layout Section
56290 \begin_layout Standard
56291 Here you can define the
56295 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
56296 \begin_inset space ~
56300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56302 reference "sec:Index"
56310 \begin_layout Section
56314 \begin_layout Standard
56315 The PDF properties are explained in section
56316 \begin_inset space ~
56320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56322 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56330 \begin_layout Section
56334 \begin_layout Standard
56335 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
56336 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56342 \begin_inset Index idx
56347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56370 \begin_inset Index idx
56375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56398 \begin_inset Index idx
56403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56406 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56426 \begin_inset Index idx
56431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56434 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56454 \begin_inset Index idx
56459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56462 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56482 \begin_inset Index idx
56487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56490 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56510 \begin_inset Index idx
56515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56518 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56538 \begin_inset Index idx
56543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56546 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56566 \begin_inset Index idx
56571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56574 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56593 \begin_inset Index idx
56598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56601 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56616 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
56619 \begin_layout Description
56620 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
56621 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56622 -errors in formulas,
56623 ensure that you have this enabled.
56626 \begin_layout Description
56627 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
56628 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56629 -errors in formulas,
56630 ensure that you have this enabled.
56633 \begin_layout Description
56634 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
56638 \begin_inset space ~
56650 \begin_layout Description
56651 esint is used for special integral characters,
56655 \begin_inset space ~
56667 \begin_layout Description
56668 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
56680 \begin_layout Description
56681 mathtools is used for the math commands
56722 and labeled arrows,
56723 see the corresponding sections in the
56730 \begin_layout Description
56731 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
56734 Chemical Symbols and Equations
56743 \begin_layout Description
56744 stackrel is used for the math command
56762 \begin_layout Description
56763 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
56766 \begin_layout Description
56767 undertilde is used for the math command
56776 Accents for one Character
56785 \begin_layout Section
56787 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
56789 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
56795 \begin_layout Standard
56797 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
56798 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
56801 \begin_layout Standard
56803 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
56804 The float placement options
56805 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
56808 are described in the section
56811 \begin_inset space ~
56815 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
56817 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
56825 \begin_inset space ~
56833 \begin_layout Section
56837 \begin_layout Standard
56838 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
56840 Program Code Listings
56845 \begin_inset space ~
56853 \begin_layout Section
56857 \begin_layout Standard
56858 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
56867 set to be used and set the
56872 The itemize environment is described in section
56873 \begin_inset space ~
56877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56879 reference "sec:Itemize"
56887 \begin_layout Standard
56888 You can furthermore specify a
56891 \begin_inset space ~
56896 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56897 command of the desired character.
56898 For example to use the € sign,
56899 you have to insert the command
56906 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
56908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
56912 \begin_inset space \space{}
56916 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
56926 To find the command for a math symbol,
56927 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
56930 \begin_layout Standard
56931 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
56934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56940 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
56941 -packages in the preamble (menu
56943 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
56944 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
56947 \begin_inset space ~
56953 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
56957 usepackage{textcomp}
56960 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
56964 usepackage{amssymb}
56974 \begin_layout Section
56978 \begin_layout Standard
56979 Branches are described in section
56980 \begin_inset space ~
56984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56986 reference "sec:Branches"
56994 \begin_layout Section
56996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
56998 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57005 \begin_layout Standard
57006 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57009 \begin_layout Description
57011 \begin_inset space ~
57015 \begin_inset space ~
57019 The format that is used when you enter
57020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57041 View Master Document
57042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57049 Update Master Document
57050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57057 menu or the toolbar.
57058 The default is set in
57060 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57061 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57063 \begin_inset space ~
57066 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57071 \begin_inset space ~
57075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57077 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57085 \begin_layout Description
57087 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57089 \begin_inset space ~
57093 \begin_inset space ~
57097 \begin_inset space ~
57100 programs If this is switched on,
57106 option which is needed with some packages.
57107 Note that this comes with security risks,
57108 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57111 \begin_layout Description
57113 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57115 \begin_inset space ~
57119 \begin_inset space ~
57122 Options offers settings for the
57130 \begin_layout Itemize
57134 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57136 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57138 \begin_inset space ~
57144 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57146 \begin_inset space ~
57150 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57156 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57158 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57159 settings for the menu
57161 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57165 \begin_inset space ~
57169 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57172 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57173 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57178 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57180 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57182 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57185 or a detailed description see section
57187 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57192 \begin_inset space ~
57198 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57202 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57206 \begin_layout Itemize
57208 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57211 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57213 determines whether so-called
57214 \begin_inset Quotes els
57218 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57222 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57223 \begin_inset Quotes els
57227 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57230 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57231 (such as sections or captions),
57232 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57234 This setting is on by default,
57235 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57237 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57238 you can uncheck this.
57239 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
57241 just leave it checked.
57247 \begin_layout Description
57249 \begin_inset space ~
57253 \begin_inset space ~
57256 Options offers settings for the export format
57264 \begin_inset space ~
57269 will assure that the output follows exactly version
57270 \begin_inset space ~
57273 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
57277 \begin_inset space ~
57282 settings are described in detail in section
57284 Math Output in XHTML
57289 \begin_inset space ~
57298 \begin_inset space ~
57302 \begin_inset space ~
57307 is used for the size of equations in the output.
57310 \begin_layout Description
57312 \begin_inset space ~
57317 Save transient properties
57319 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57320 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57324 \begin_layout Itemize
57325 the activation of change tracking
57328 \begin_layout Itemize
57329 the output of tracked changes
57332 \begin_layout Itemize
57333 the recording of the document directory path.
57336 \begin_layout Standard
57337 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
57341 \begin_layout Section
57349 \begin_layout Standard
57350 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57351 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
57353 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
57355 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
57358 \begin_layout Standard
57359 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57360 -syntax is given in section
57361 \begin_inset space ~
57365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57367 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
57375 \begin_layout Chapter
57381 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57383 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
57388 \begin_inset Index idx
57393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57402 \begin_layout Standard
57403 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
57405 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57409 It has the following submenus.
57412 \begin_layout Section
57416 \begin_layout Subsection
57420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57421 User Interface File
57422 \begin_inset Index idx
57427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57429 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57444 \begin_inset Index idx
57449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57451 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57468 \begin_layout Standard
57469 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
57470 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
57478 \begin_layout Description
57483 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
57486 \begin_layout Description
57493 the menu entries in popup context menus
57496 \begin_layout Description
57501 specifies the toolbar buttons
57504 \begin_layout Standard
57505 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
57506 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
57509 \begin_layout Standard
57510 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
57524 entries must be finished with an explicit
57554 and in the case of the
57555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57567 The syntax for the entries is:
57570 \begin_layout Standard
57571 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57600 \begin_layout Standard
57602 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57605 All the \SpecialChar LyX
57606 -functions are listed in the menu
57608 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
57610 \begin_inset space ~
57618 \begin_layout Standard
57619 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
57625 \begin_layout Standard
57627 assuming you use the menu
57629 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57632 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
57633 you can add the line
57636 \begin_layout Standard
57637 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57661 \begin_layout Standard
57663 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57678 to have the sixth bookmark.
57681 \begin_layout Standard
57685 \begin_inset space ~
57690 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
57691 's toolbar buttons.
57692 The currently available icon sets are compared in
57693 \begin_inset CommandInset href
57696 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
57704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57708 \begin_layout Standard
57711 Enable tool tips in main work area
57713 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
57716 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57720 \begin_layout Standard
57725 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
57726 should display in the menu
57728 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
57730 \begin_inset space ~
57738 \begin_layout Subsection
57742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57746 \begin_layout Standard
57749 Restore window layouts and geometries
57752 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57756 \begin_layout Standard
57759 Restore cursor positions
57761 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
57764 \begin_layout Standard
57767 Load opened files from last session
57769 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
57773 \begin_layout Standard
57776 Clear all session information
57778 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
57779 sessions (cursor positions,
57780 names of last opened documents,
57784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57788 name "subsec:Backup documents"
57793 \begin_inset Index idx
57798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57800 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57817 \begin_layout Standard
57820 Backup original documents when saving
57822 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
57823 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
57824 opened or when it was
57826 saved the last time.
57827 It is stored in the
57830 \begin_inset space ~
57836 \begin_inset space ~
57840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57842 reference "sec:Paths"
57847 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
57850 \begin_inset space ~
57856 The backup file has the file extension
57857 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
57861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57867 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
57871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57875 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
57876 and the same name than the original file.
57880 \begin_inset space ~
57886 the file has the full path in its file name,
57888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57903 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
57906 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
57912 \begin_layout Standard
57914 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
57917 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
57920 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
57921 These files which are stored as
57925 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
57926 Should \SpecialChar LyX
57927 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
57928 this file can be used as a resort.
57931 \begin_layout Standard
57933 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
57934 Please read section
57935 \begin_inset space ~
57939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57941 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
57945 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
57946 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
57951 \begin_layout Standard
57953 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
57960 you can specify the time between backup saves.
57965 \begin_layout Standard
57968 Save documents compressed by default
57970 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
57971 \begin_inset space ~
57975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57977 reference "subsec:Compressed"
57983 This applies to newly created documents only.
57984 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
57985 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
57989 \begin_layout Standard
57991 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
57994 Save the document directory path
57996 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
57998 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
57999 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58004 \begin_layout Standard
58006 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58007 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58008 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58009 The temporary file name is
58018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58019 Windows & work area
58022 \begin_layout Standard
58025 Open documents in tabs
58028 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58032 \begin_layout Standard
58037 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58044 \begin_inset space ~
58048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58050 reference "sec:Paths"
58055 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58064 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58066 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58067 instance is created for each file.
58070 \begin_layout Standard
58073 Single close-tab button
58076 there will only be one close button (
58086 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58087 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58088 Regardless of this option,
58089 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58092 \begin_layout Standard
58093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58102 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58103 before the change takes effect.
58111 \begin_layout Standard
58116 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
58117 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
58119 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
58123 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
58124 and only want to close the view in once instance.
58127 \begin_layout Subsection
58129 \begin_inset Index idx
58134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58136 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58153 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
58160 \begin_layout Standard
58161 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
58165 \begin_layout Standard
58166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58175 This section only deals with the fonts
58179 the \SpecialChar LyX
58181 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
58182 and set in the menu
58184 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58185 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58196 \begin_layout Standard
58216 (depends on the system) as its
58219 \begin_inset space ~
58235 \begin_layout Standard
58236 You can change the font size with the
58243 \begin_layout Standard
58248 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
58250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58253 points have the size of 1
58254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58259 \begin_inset space ~
58263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58265 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
58271 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
58272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58276 The sizes are explained in detail in section
58277 \begin_inset space ~
58281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58283 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
58291 \begin_layout Subsection
58293 \begin_inset Index idx
58298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58300 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58316 \begin_inset Index idx
58321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58340 \begin_layout Standard
58341 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
58342 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
58349 \begin_layout Standard
58350 By checking the option
58354 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
58362 \begin_inset space ~
58366 \begin_inset space ~
58371 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
58374 \begin_layout Subsection
58376 \begin_inset Index idx
58381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58383 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58400 \begin_layout Standard
58401 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
58405 \begin_layout Standard
58410 enables previewing snippets of your document.
58411 This feature is described in section
58412 \begin_inset space ~
58416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58418 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
58426 \begin_layout Standard
58427 Checking the option
58430 \begin_inset space ~
58434 \begin_inset space ~
58438 \begin_inset space ~
58443 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
58446 \begin_layout Section
58448 \begin_inset Index idx
58453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58455 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58472 \begin_layout Subsection
58476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58480 \begin_layout Standard
58483 Cursor follows scrollbar
58485 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
58488 \begin_layout Standard
58489 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
58490 If you set the value to zero,
58491 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
58494 \begin_layout Standard
58497 Scroll below end of document
58499 is self-explanatory.
58502 \begin_layout Standard
58503 In \SpecialChar LyX
58504 one can jump from word to word by pressing
58511 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
58513 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
58514 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
58515 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
58519 \begin_layout Standard
58521 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
58524 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
58526 is only relevant in documents that
58532 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
58540 markup) with this option selected.
58541 It the option is not selected,
58542 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
58543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58548 \begin_inset Quotes els
58552 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58556 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
58557 dissolving from insets.
58568 \begin_inset Quotes els
58572 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58575 notwithstanding the state of this option.
58580 \begin_layout Standard
58583 Sort environments alphabetically
58585 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58588 \begin_layout Standard
58591 Group environments by their category
58593 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
58596 \begin_layout Standard
58601 options determine the editing style for math macros,
58611 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
58615 \begin_layout Standard
58617 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58620 Search drive for cited files
58622 allows \SpecialChar LyX
58623 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
58626 \begin_inset space ~
58630 \begin_inset space ~
58634 \begin_inset space ~
58638 \begin_inset space ~
58641 Content\SpecialChar ldots
58644 context menu on a citation.
58648 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
58650 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
58653 field determines the search pattern.
58655 \begin_inset space ~
58659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58661 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
58671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58675 \begin_layout Standard
58676 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58681 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58682 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58683 the text then appears centered.
58686 \begin_layout Subsection
58688 \begin_inset Index idx
58693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58700 \begin_inset Index idx
58705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58707 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58724 \begin_layout Standard
58729 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
58731 Several binding files are available,
58735 \begin_layout Description
58736 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
58739 \begin_layout Description
58740 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
58751 \begin_layout Description
58752 mac.bind a set of bindings for
58755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58763 \begin_layout Standard
58764 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
58770 and binding files for special languages.
58771 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
58773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58777 \begin_inset space \space{}
58781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58789 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
58790 in a certain language,
58792 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
58795 \begin_layout Standard
58796 Some binding files,
58802 only have a limited scope.
58803 When looking at the end of the file
58808 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
58811 \begin_layout Standard
58815 \begin_inset space ~
58819 \begin_inset space ~
58824 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
58827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58831 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
58836 \begin_inset Index idx
58841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58843 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58860 \begin_layout Standard
58861 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
58862 functions and the bound shortcuts.
58863 To find functions easily,
58864 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
58866 Show key-bindings containing
58869 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
58870 Insert there for example as keyword
58871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58878 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
58879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58888 one function can have more than one shortcut.
58889 All \SpecialChar LyX
58890 functions are also listed in the file
58895 that you will find in the
58902 \begin_layout Standard
58904 to add the shortcut
58913 select the function and press the
58918 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
58919 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
58922 \begin_layout Standard
58923 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
58924 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
58925 Function definition with “
58928 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
58930 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
58935 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
58937 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
58940 \begin_layout Standard
58941 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
58945 \begin_layout Standard
58946 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
58947 The syntax of the entries is:
58950 \begin_layout Standard
58956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58975 \begin_layout Standard
58978 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
58979 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
58980 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59013 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59014 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59015 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59016 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59021 you needed to specify it as
59026 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59027 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59029 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59032 \begin_layout Subsection
59034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59036 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59041 \begin_inset Index idx
59046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59053 \begin_inset Index idx
59058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59060 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59077 \begin_layout Standard
59078 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59079 For the case where this is not possible,
59081 provides keyboard maps.
59084 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59088 \begin_inset space ~
59092 \begin_inset space ~
59097 and select the keyboard map file named
59104 \begin_layout Standard
59119 you can select the first and second with
59122 arg "keymap-primary"
59128 arg "keymap-secondary"
59131 respectively or toggle between them with
59134 arg "keymap-toggle"
59140 \begin_layout Standard
59141 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59150 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
59158 \begin_layout Standard
59159 You can also specify the mouse
59161 Wheel scrolling speed
59164 The standard value is 1.0;
59165 higher values speed up the scrolling,
59166 lower ones slow it down.
59169 Middle mouse button pasting
59171 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
59174 \begin_layout Standard
59182 \begin_inset space ~
59186 \begin_inset space ~
59192 you can select a key for zooming.
59193 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
59194 the text is zoomed.
59197 \begin_layout Subsection
59201 \begin_layout Standard
59202 Input completion is described in section
59203 \begin_inset space ~
59207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59209 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
59217 \begin_layout Section
59219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59226 \begin_inset Index idx
59231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59238 \begin_inset Index idx
59243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59245 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59262 \begin_layout Standard
59263 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
59264 are normally determined during the installation.
59265 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
59268 \begin_layout Description
59270 \begin_inset space ~
59273 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
59274 's working directory.
59275 It is the default when you
59287 \begin_inset space ~
59295 \begin_layout Description
59297 \begin_inset space ~
59300 templates This directory
59301 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
59302 contains the templates that are shown
59303 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
59304 will be opened when you use the menu
59305 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
59310 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59312 \begin_inset space ~
59316 \begin_inset space ~
59324 \begin_layout Description
59326 \begin_inset space ~
59329 files This directory
59330 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
59331 will be opened when you use the
59332 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
59333 contains the example files that are listed in
59336 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
59345 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59347 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
59349 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
59355 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
59357 \begin_inset Newline newline
59361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59374 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
59375 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
59385 \begin_layout Description
59387 \begin_inset space ~
59391 \begin_inset Index idx
59396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59398 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59412 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
59413 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
59414 \begin_inset space ~
59418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59420 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59430 will be used to save the backups.
59431 \begin_inset Newline newline
59434 Backup files have the ending
59435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59445 \begin_layout Description
59447 \begin_inset space ~
59450 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
59451 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
59453 \begin_inset Newline newline
59461 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59467 You can edit this file with the program
59476 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
59477 in its preferences under
59480 \begin_inset space ~
59486 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
59491 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
59493 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
59500 and \SpecialChar LyX
59501 need to be running the same time.
59502 \begin_inset Newline newline
59505 The pipe is also used for the
59511 \begin_inset space ~
59515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59517 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59523 \begin_inset Newline newline
59526 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
59527 Server-Pipe on Windows,
59528 you must use this pipe name:
59529 \begin_inset Newline newline
59545 \begin_layout Description
59547 \begin_inset space ~
59550 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
59553 \begin_layout Description
59555 \begin_inset space ~
59558 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
59559 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59562 \begin_layout Description
59564 \begin_inset space ~
59567 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
59572 You only need to specify it if you are using
59576 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
59577 For \SpecialChar LyX
59582 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
59585 \begin_layout Description
59587 \begin_inset space ~
59590 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
59591 When \SpecialChar LyX
59592 needs to use an external program,
59593 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
59594 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
59596 so you normally don't have to modify it.
59598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59606 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
59609 \begin_layout Description
59611 \begin_inset space ~
59614 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
59615 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
59616 code or in the document preamble.
59617 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
59618 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
59619 If files are included,
59620 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
59621 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
59623 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
59624 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
59627 \begin_layout Section
59631 \begin_layout Standard
59632 Here you can insert your
59641 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
59642 as described in section
59643 \begin_inset space ~
59647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59649 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
59655 to mark changes you make as yours.
59658 \begin_layout Section
59660 \begin_inset Index idx
59665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59667 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59682 \begin_inset Index idx
59687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59689 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59706 \begin_layout Subsection
59708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59710 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
59717 \begin_layout Description
59719 \begin_inset space ~
59723 \begin_inset space ~
59726 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
59728 You can find its actual translation status here:
59730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
59732 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
59738 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
59742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59744 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
59745 LaTeX Language Support
59750 \begin_layout Description
59752 \begin_inset space ~
59755 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
59756 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
59757 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
59758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59774 The most widespread language package is
59779 \begin_inset Index idx
59784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59802 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
59804 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
59805 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
59806 come with the alternative language package
59811 \begin_inset Index idx
59816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59819 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59833 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
59835 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
59840 The available selections are described in section
59841 \begin_inset space ~
59845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59847 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
59855 \begin_layout Description
59857 \begin_inset space ~
59861 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
59862 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
59863 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
59865 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
59869 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
59873 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
59875 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
59879 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
59880 that is used to switch to a different language
59881 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
59882 to start the package
59886 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
59887 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
59891 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
59892 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
59895 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59899 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59908 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
59916 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
59919 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
59921 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
59926 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
59944 selectlanguage{$$lang}
59945 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59953 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
59958 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
59964 this setting is ignored.
59969 \begin_layout Description
59971 \begin_inset space ~
59975 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
59982 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
59983 Use this if the language switch set in
59987 needs to be explicitly ended,
59992 's alternative command
59996 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
59997 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60000 end{otherlanguage*}
60004 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60007 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60008 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60014 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60016 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60020 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60026 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60032 this setting is ignored.
60037 \begin_layout Description
60039 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60041 \begin_inset space ~
60045 \begin_inset space ~
60048 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60051 \begin_layout Description
60053 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60055 \begin_inset space ~
60059 \begin_inset space ~
60062 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60068 \begin_layout Description
60070 \begin_inset space ~
60074 \begin_inset space ~
60078 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60080 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60083 this option is set,
60084 the languages used in the document will be added
60085 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60088 to the document class options
60089 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60090 rather than the language package options.
60091 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60096 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60097 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60099 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60100 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60102 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
60106 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
60107 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
60116 \begin_layout Description
60118 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
60120 \begin_inset space ~
60124 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
60126 \begin_inset space ~
60130 \begin_inset space ~
60134 \begin_inset space ~
60140 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
60142 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
60145 this option is set,
60147 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
60148 the language switch defined in
60151 \begin_inset space ~
60156 is output at the beginning of the document,
60157 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
60158 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
60159 This might be needed if you use a non-default
60162 \begin_inset space ~
60167 or if a package resets the document language.
60169 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
60170 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
60171 documents start with the chosen document language.
60172 When this option is not set,
60176 \begin_inset space ~
60181 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60183 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
60186 \begin_inset space ~
60196 \begin_layout Description
60198 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
60200 \begin_inset space ~
60204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
60206 \begin_inset space ~
60210 \begin_inset space ~
60214 \begin_inset space ~
60220 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
60224 \begin_inset space ~
60228 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
60229 Set document language explicitly
60235 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
60237 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
60244 \begin_inset space ~
60250 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
60252 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
60256 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
60258 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
60261 the end of the document.
60262 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
60266 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60267 \paragraph_spacing single
60269 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
60275 \begin_layout Description
60277 \begin_inset space ~
60281 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
60283 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
60287 \begin_inset space ~
60291 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
60294 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
60296 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
60300 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
60303 in a language different
60304 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
60306 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
60309 the document language will be
60310 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
60311 marked (by default with a blue
60314 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
60316 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
60320 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
60324 \begin_layout Description
60326 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
60328 \begin_inset space ~
60332 \begin_inset space ~
60336 \begin_inset space ~
60341 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
60342 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
60343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60347 English and Hebrew:
60349 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
60355 \begin_layout Description
60357 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
60359 \begin_inset space ~
60363 \begin_inset space ~
60366 support Enables the use of languages,
60367 written from right to left (RTL),
60374 \begin_layout Description
60376 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60378 \begin_inset space ~
60382 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
60384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60388 \begin_inset space ~
60392 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
60393 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
60394 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
60396 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
60400 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
60402 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
60403 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
60407 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60409 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
60413 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
60418 \begin_layout Standard
60423 means that the cursor
60424 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
60425 follows the logic of the text direction,
60426 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
60428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60432 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
60433 Hebrew embedded in English),
60434 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
60439 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
60440 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
60441 right arrow in this specific case always means:
60446 in text (even if this means:
60453 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60454 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
60455 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
60456 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
60457 since the cursor then follows a coherent
60458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60469 \begin_layout Standard
60471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
60477 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
60479 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
60480 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
60485 ) when coming from the left.
60486 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
60487 at the expense of the text logic.
60488 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60489 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
60490 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
60495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60497 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
60501 \begin_layout Description
60503 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
60505 \begin_inset space ~
60509 \begin_inset space ~
60512 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
60514 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
60515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60521 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
60524 \begin_layout Description
60526 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
60528 \begin_inset space ~
60532 \begin_inset space ~
60535 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60541 \begin_layout Subsection
60545 \begin_layout Standard
60546 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
60547 \begin_inset space ~
60551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60553 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
60561 \begin_layout Section
60565 \begin_layout Subsection
60567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60569 name "subsec:General-output"
60576 \begin_layout Description
60578 \begin_inset space ~
60581 search Commands that will be used for the menu
60583 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
60585 \begin_inset space ~
60591 For a detailed description see section
60593 Reverse DVI/PDF search
60598 \begin_inset space ~
60606 \begin_layout Description
60608 \begin_inset space ~
60611 Options Options for the program
60615 that is used for the export format
60621 \begin_inset space ~
60625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60627 reference "subsec:Export"
60633 Possible options are listed in the
60638 \begin_inset Newline newline
60642 \begin_inset Flex URL
60645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60647 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
60657 \begin_layout Description
60659 \begin_inset space ~
60663 \begin_inset space ~
60666 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
60668 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
60669 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
60671 \begin_inset space ~
60677 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
60680 \begin_layout Description
60682 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
60684 \begin_inset space ~
60688 \begin_inset Index idx
60693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60700 \begin_inset Index idx
60705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60707 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60721 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
60722 \begin_inset Newline newline
60726 \begin_inset Flex URL
60729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60731 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
60737 \begin_inset Newline newline
60740 For example the format
60741 \begin_inset Newline newline
60745 \begin_inset Newline newline
60748 prints the date as day/month/year.
60753 \begin_layout Description
60755 \begin_inset space ~
60759 \begin_inset space ~
60762 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
60763 is allowed to overwrite on export.
60766 \begin_layout Subsection
60772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60774 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
60779 \begin_inset Index idx
60784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60804 \begin_layout Description
60806 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
60808 \begin_inset space ~
60816 \begin_inset space ~
60820 \begin_inset space ~
60823 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
60828 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
60852 are used for Cyrillic.
60853 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
60855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60868 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
60869 sets up in the background.
60870 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
60875 \begin_layout Description
60877 \begin_inset space ~
60881 \begin_inset space ~
60885 \begin_inset space ~
60889 \begin_inset space ~
60892 options They only have an effect when the program
60896 is used as DVI-viewer,
60897 read its manual to find out more.
60900 \begin_layout Standard
60901 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
60902 But before you change something,
60903 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
60906 \begin_layout Description
60908 \begin_inset space ~
60911 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
60913 \begin_inset space ~
60917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60919 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
60927 \begin_layout Description
60929 \begin_inset space ~
60932 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
60934 \begin_inset space ~
60938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60940 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
60948 \begin_layout Description
60950 \begin_inset space ~
60953 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
60955 \begin_inset space ~
60959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60961 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
60969 \begin_layout Description
60975 \begin_inset space ~
60978 command Command for the program
60980 Check\SpecialChar TeX
60983 that is described in the section
60985 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
60990 Additional Features
60995 \begin_layout Standard
60996 There are additionally the following options:
60999 \begin_layout Description
61001 \begin_inset space ~
61005 \begin_inset space ~
61009 \begin_inset space ~
61013 \begin_inset space ~
61018 \begin_inset space ~
61021 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61040 to separate folders.
61041 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61043 \begin_inset Index idx
61048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61055 \begin_inset Index idx
61060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61062 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61079 \begin_layout Description
61081 \begin_inset space ~
61085 \begin_inset space ~
61089 \begin_inset space ~
61093 \begin_inset space ~
61097 \begin_inset space ~
61101 \begin_inset space ~
61104 changes Removes all manually set
61110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
61111 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
61113 \begin_inset space ~
61118 dialog when changing the document class.
61121 \begin_layout Section
61123 \begin_inset space ~
61127 \begin_inset Index idx
61132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61141 \begin_layout Subsection
61143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61145 name "subsec:Converters"
61150 \begin_inset Index idx
61155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61164 \begin_layout Standard
61165 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
61166 You can modify converters or create new ones.
61167 To modify a converter,
61169 change the entry of the
61176 \begin_inset space ~
61181 field and press the
61186 To create a new converter,
61187 select an existing one,
61188 select a different format in the
61191 \begin_inset space ~
61201 field and press the
61208 \begin_layout Standard
61211 Converter File Cache
61218 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
61220 Maximum Age (in days
61223 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
61224 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
61227 \begin_layout Standard
61228 More about converters,
61229 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
61230 is described in the section
61241 \begin_layout Subsection
61243 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61245 name "sec:File-Formats"
61250 \begin_inset Index idx
61255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61262 \begin_inset Index idx
61267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61276 \begin_layout Standard
61277 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
61287 programs that should be used for certain formats.
61290 \begin_layout Standard
61291 You can also define the
61293 Default output format
61295 that is used when you use
61299 View Master Document
61303 Update Master Document
61309 menu or the toolbar.
61312 \begin_layout Standard
61313 More about formats and their options is described in the section
61324 \begin_layout Standard
61325 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
61326 's temporary directory,
61327 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
61328 This is done by specifying a
61333 More about this is described in the section
61344 \begin_layout Chapter
61345 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61347 \begin_inset Index idx
61352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61361 name "chap:Units-available-in"
61368 \begin_layout Standard
61370 \begin_inset space ~
61374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61376 reference "tab:Units"
61381 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61382 and used in this documentation.
61385 \begin_layout Standard
61386 \begin_inset Float table
61393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61394 \begin_inset Caption Standard
61396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61412 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
61418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61420 \begin_inset Tabular
61421 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
61422 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
61423 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61424 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
61425 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61578 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
61582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61776 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61817 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61849 scaled point (65536
61850 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61917 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
61922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62041 % of original image width
62046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62130 \begin_layout Standard
62131 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
62134 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
62141 \begin_layout Bibliography
62142 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62143 LatexCommand bibitem
62150 The \SpecialChar LyX
62153 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62156 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
62162 \begin_inset Newline newline
62166 \begin_inset Flex URL
62169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62171 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
62179 \begin_layout Bibliography
62180 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62181 LatexCommand bibitem
62182 key "latexcompanion"
62187 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
62190 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62191 Companion Second Edition.
62198 \begin_layout Bibliography
62199 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62200 LatexCommand bibitem
62206 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
62210 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
62218 \begin_layout Bibliography
62219 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62220 LatexCommand bibitem
62231 A Document Preparation System.
62239 \begin_layout Bibliography
62240 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62241 LatexCommand bibitem
62251 The \SpecialChar TeX
62259 \begin_layout Bibliography
62260 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62261 LatexCommand bibitem
62267 The \SpecialChar TeX
62269 \begin_inset Newline newline
62273 \begin_inset Flex URL
62276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62278 https://ctan.org/topic
62286 \begin_layout Bibliography
62287 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62288 LatexCommand bibitem
62294 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62296 \begin_inset Newline newline
62300 \begin_inset Flex URL
62303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62305 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
62313 \begin_layout Bibliography
62314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62315 LatexCommand bibitem
62322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62324 name "Documentation"
62325 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
62332 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62336 \begin_inset Newline newline
62340 \begin_inset Flex URL
62343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62345 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
62353 \begin_layout Bibliography
62354 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62355 LatexCommand bibitem
62362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62364 name "Documentation"
62365 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
62370 how to use the program
62372 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62376 \begin_inset Newline newline
62380 \begin_inset Flex URL
62383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62385 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
62393 \begin_layout Bibliography
62394 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62395 LatexCommand bibitem
62402 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62404 name "Documentation"
62405 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
62410 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62416 \begin_inset Index idx
62421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62424 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62439 \begin_inset Newline newline
62443 \begin_inset Flex URL
62446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62448 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
62456 \begin_layout Bibliography
62457 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62458 LatexCommand bibitem
62465 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62467 name "Documentation"
62468 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
62473 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62479 \begin_inset Index idx
62484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62487 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62502 \begin_inset Newline newline
62506 \begin_inset Flex URL
62509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62511 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
62519 \begin_layout Bibliography
62520 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62521 LatexCommand bibitem
62528 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62530 name "Documentation"
62531 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
62541 \begin_inset Newline newline
62545 \begin_inset Flex URL
62548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62550 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
62558 \begin_layout Bibliography
62559 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62560 LatexCommand bibitem
62561 key "makeindex-man"
62567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62570 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
62580 \begin_inset Newline newline
62584 \begin_inset Flex URL
62587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62589 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
62595 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
62599 \begin_layout Bibliography
62601 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
62602 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62603 LatexCommand bibitem
62610 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62612 name "Documentation"
62613 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
62623 \begin_inset Newline newline
62627 \begin_inset Flex URL
62630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62632 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
62634 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
62646 \begin_layout Bibliography
62647 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62648 LatexCommand bibitem
62655 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62657 name "Documentation"
62658 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
62668 \begin_inset Newline newline
62672 \begin_inset Flex URL
62675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62677 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
62685 \begin_layout Bibliography
62686 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62687 LatexCommand bibitem
62694 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62696 name "Documentation"
62697 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
62702 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
62704 \begin_inset Newline newline
62708 \begin_inset Flex URL
62711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62713 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
62721 \begin_layout Bibliography
62722 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62723 LatexCommand bibitem
62730 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62732 name "Documentation"
62733 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
62738 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62744 \begin_inset Index idx
62749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62752 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62767 \begin_inset Newline newline
62771 \begin_inset Flex URL
62774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62776 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
62784 \begin_layout Bibliography
62785 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62786 LatexCommand bibitem
62793 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62795 name "Documentation"
62796 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
62801 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62807 \begin_inset Index idx
62812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62830 \begin_inset Newline newline
62834 \begin_inset Flex URL
62837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62839 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
62847 \begin_layout Bibliography
62848 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62849 LatexCommand bibitem
62856 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62858 name "Documentation"
62859 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
62864 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62870 \begin_inset Index idx
62875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62878 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62893 \begin_inset Newline newline
62897 \begin_inset Flex URL
62900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62902 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
62910 \begin_layout Bibliography
62911 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62912 LatexCommand bibitem
62919 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62921 name "Documentation"
62922 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
62927 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62933 \begin_inset Index idx
62938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62941 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62956 \begin_inset Newline newline
62960 \begin_inset Flex URL
62963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62965 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
62973 \begin_layout Bibliography
62974 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62975 LatexCommand bibitem
62982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62984 name "Documentation"
62985 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
62990 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62996 \begin_inset Index idx
63001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63004 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63019 \begin_inset Newline newline
63023 \begin_inset Flex URL
63026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63028 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63036 \begin_layout Bibliography
63037 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63038 LatexCommand bibitem
63045 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63047 name "Documentation"
63048 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63053 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63059 \begin_inset Index idx
63064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63067 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63082 \begin_inset Newline newline
63086 \begin_inset Flex URL
63089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63091 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63099 \begin_layout Bibliography
63100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63101 LatexCommand bibitem
63108 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63110 name "Documentation"
63111 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
63116 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63122 \begin_inset Index idx
63127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63130 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63145 \begin_inset Newline newline
63149 \begin_inset Flex URL
63152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63154 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
63162 \begin_layout Bibliography
63163 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63164 LatexCommand bibitem
63171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63173 name "Documentation"
63174 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
63179 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63185 \begin_inset Index idx
63190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63193 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63208 \begin_inset Newline newline
63212 \begin_inset Flex URL
63215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63217 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
63225 \begin_layout Bibliography
63226 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63227 LatexCommand bibitem
63234 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63237 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
63242 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63244 \begin_inset Newline newline
63248 \begin_inset Flex URL
63251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63253 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
63261 \begin_layout Bibliography
63262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63263 LatexCommand bibitem
63270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63273 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
63278 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63280 \begin_inset Newline newline
63284 \begin_inset Flex URL
63287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63289 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
63297 \begin_layout Bibliography
63298 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63299 LatexCommand bibitem
63306 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63309 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
63314 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63315 for Cyrillic languages:
63316 \begin_inset Newline newline
63320 \begin_inset Flex URL
63323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63325 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
63333 \begin_layout Bibliography
63334 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63335 LatexCommand bibitem
63342 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63345 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
63350 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63352 \begin_inset Newline newline
63356 \begin_inset Flex URL
63359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63361 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
63369 \begin_layout Bibliography
63370 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63371 LatexCommand bibitem
63378 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63381 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
63386 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63388 \begin_inset Newline newline
63392 \begin_inset Flex URL
63395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63397 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
63405 \begin_layout Bibliography
63406 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63407 LatexCommand bibitem
63414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63417 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
63422 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63424 \begin_inset Newline newline
63428 \begin_inset Flex URL
63431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63433 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
63441 \begin_layout Standard
63442 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63477 \begin_inset Note Note
63480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63487 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
63488 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
63496 \begin_layout Standard
63497 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
63498 LatexCommand bibtex
63499 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
63500 options "biblio/alphadin"
63507 \begin_layout Standard
63508 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63512 \begin_layout Standard
63516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63522 pagedeclaration}[1]{
63525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63532 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
63540 \begin_inset Note Note
63543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63544 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
63546 \begin_inset space ~
63550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
63552 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
63565 \begin_layout Standard
63566 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
63567 LatexCommand printnomenclature
63573 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
63574 LatexCommand printindex